WO2017149841A1 - Meeting system - Google Patents

Meeting system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2017149841A1
WO2017149841A1 PCT/JP2016/083444 JP2016083444W WO2017149841A1 WO 2017149841 A1 WO2017149841 A1 WO 2017149841A1 JP 2016083444 W JP2016083444 W JP 2016083444W WO 2017149841 A1 WO2017149841 A1 WO 2017149841A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
unit
information
control unit
setting
conference system
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2016/083444
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
櫻井和幸
遠藤康弘
Original Assignee
株式会社オーディオテクニカ
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 株式会社オーディオテクニカ filed Critical 株式会社オーディオテクニカ
Priority to JP2018502518A priority Critical patent/JP6719785B2/en
Publication of WO2017149841A1 publication Critical patent/WO2017149841A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04MTELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M3/00Automatic or semi-automatic exchanges
    • H04M3/42Systems providing special services or facilities to subscribers
    • H04M3/56Arrangements for connecting several subscribers to a common circuit, i.e. affording conference facilities
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N7/00Television systems
    • H04N7/14Systems for two-way working
    • H04N7/15Conference systems

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a conference system.
  • the conference system is used, for example, for a conference where a large number of participants attend, such as a committee.
  • the conference system includes one control unit, a plurality of discussion units connected to the control unit via a communication line (wired or wireless), a microphone attached to the discussion unit, an operation terminal connected to the control unit, It consists of
  • the control unit manages the operation of each discussion unit and controls the operation of the entire conference system.
  • the discussion unit picks up the voice of the user of the discussion unit with a microphone to generate voice information, and transmits the voice information to the control unit.
  • the operation terminal is a terminal used by a facilitator of a meeting such as a chairperson to advance a meeting, or used by an administrator of the meeting system to set a control unit and a discussion unit.
  • Information used for input of information used for proceeding of the conference and information used for setting of the control unit and the like is input to an input screen displayed on the display unit of the operation terminal (for example, see Non-Patent Document 1).
  • the items set in the conference system are diverse, such as items set in the initial stage of introduction of the conference system, items set immediately before the meeting is held for each meeting, and items set in the middle of the meeting.
  • the conference system operates based on the content set for each item. Therefore, the contents set in each item must be consistent with each other. That is, depending on the item, the content of the item to be set later has to be determined or restricted depending on the content of the item already set.
  • the setting person and setting time of each item may be different. Therefore, when another item is set while the item to be set first is not set, contradiction may occur in the contents set in each item. Therefore, the conference system may malfunction.
  • the present invention has been made to solve the problems of the prior art as described above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a conference system capable of realizing reliable setting work with a simple configuration.
  • the present invention is a conference system, comprising a control unit, a discussion unit, and an operation terminal, wherein the discussion unit transmits audio information to the control unit, and the operation terminal comprises the control unit and the control unit.
  • the control unit is connected to each of the discussion units via a communication line, the control unit includes a storage unit, the operation terminal includes a display unit and a control unit, and the storage unit is an operation of the control unit and the discussion unit.
  • FIG. 1 is a network configuration diagram showing an embodiment of a conference system according to the present invention. It is a functional block diagram which shows the hardware constitutions of the control unit with which the meeting system of FIG. 1 is provided. It is a data structure figure of the packet which the control unit of FIG. 2 transmits / receives. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of the information memorize
  • FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the discussion unit of FIG. 6 with a microphone attached. It is a functional block diagram which shows the hardware constitutions of the operating terminal with which the meeting system of FIG. 1 is provided. It is a flowchart which shows the information processing of the conference system concerning this invention provided with one control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the information processing of the control unit in the initialization process of the information processing of FIG. It is a sequence diagram which shows the information processing of the conference system in the initialization process of FIG. It is another sequence diagram which shows the information processing of the meeting system in the initialization process of FIG. FIG. 13 is yet another sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system in the initialization processing of FIG.
  • FIG. 23 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system when there is a change in the connection state of the discussion unit in the operation processing of FIG. 22; It is a flowchart which shows the information processing of the control unit in the change process of the operation process of FIG. It is a sequence diagram which shows the information processing of the conference system as an example of the initialization process in the change process of FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of the information memorize
  • FIG. 1 is a network configuration diagram showing an embodiment of a conference system according to the present invention.
  • the conference system S is used, for example, in a conference where a large number of participants attend, such as a committee.
  • the conference system S facilitates the progress of the conference, and creates the minutes of the conference.
  • the conference system S includes a control unit (hereinafter referred to as "CU") 1A-1C, a discussion unit (hereinafter referred to as "DU”) 2A1-2A4, 2B1-2B4, 2C1-2C4 and microphones 3A1-3A4, 3B1-. 3B4 and 3C1-3C4 and the operation terminal 4 are provided.
  • CU control unit
  • DU discussion unit
  • the configurations of CU1A-1C are all the same.
  • the configurations of DU2A1-2A4, 2B1-2B4, and 2C1-2C4 are all the same.
  • the configurations of the microphones 3A1-3A4, 3B1-3B4, 3C1-3C4 are all the same.
  • each is collectively referred to as “CU1”.
  • DU2A1-2A4, 2B1-2B4, and 2C1-2C4 each is collectively referred to as "DU2”.
  • each of the microphones 3A1-3A4, 3B1-3B4 and 3C1-3C4 they are collectively referred to as a "microphone 3".
  • the number of CU1 and the number of DU2 that configure the conference system S are not limited to the present embodiment. That is, for example, the number of DU2 connected to each CU1 may be different.
  • connection method of a plurality of DUs 2 to the CU 1 will be described.
  • the plurality of DUs 2 are connected to the CU 1 by any one of a ring connection method (hereinafter referred to as “ring connection”) and a daisy chain connection method (hereinafter referred to as “daisy connection”).
  • ring connection a ring connection method
  • daisy chain connection method a daisy chain connection method
  • the ring connection is a connection method in which a plurality of DUs 2 are connected in series in a ring shape with the CU 1.
  • DU2A1-2A4 is connected to CU1A by ring connection.
  • DU2 is connected to CU1 by ring connection, two terminals of the unit connection part of CU1 described later are used.
  • the daisy connection is a connection method in which a plurality of DUs 2 are connected in series with the CU 1 in a beaded connection.
  • DU2C1-2C4 is daisy-connected to CU1C.
  • DU2 is connected to CU1 by daisy connection, one terminal of a unit connection unit of CU1 described later is used.
  • the mode of connection between CU1 and DU2 is not limited to this embodiment. That is, for example, a plurality of DUs 2 may be connected to one CU 1 in a mixed manner of two connection methods of ring connection and daisy connection. That is, one DU 2 may be ring connected to CU 1 and the other DU 2 may be daisy connected to the same CU 1.
  • connection between CUs 1 will be described.
  • the three CU1 are connected by daisy connection.
  • CU1B and CU1C are daisy-connected to CU1A.
  • CU1A is set to a master (Master)
  • CU1B and CU1C are set to a slave (Slave).
  • the master and the slave will be described later.
  • each CU 1 Supply of power to each CU 1 is individually performed via an AC adapter or the like. That is, the supply of power between CU1 is not performed. Therefore, in the conference system S, the respective CUs 1 can be installed at physically separated locations without being restricted by the power supply.
  • FIG. 2 is a functional block diagram showing a hardware configuration of CU1.
  • the CU 1 controls the operation of the DU 2 and also controls the operation of the entire conference system S.
  • the CU 1 includes a communication unit 11, a connection unit 12, a storage unit 13, a display unit 14, an operation unit 15, and a control unit 16.
  • the communication unit 11 realizes communication with the other CU 1, DU 2, the operation terminal 4, the external device 5, and the like through the connection unit 12.
  • the communication unit 11 performs communication in compliance with, for example, IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) 802.3.
  • Communication between CU1 and DU2 or between CU1 as a master and CU1 as a slave is performed by transmitting and receiving packets.
  • the packet includes a header part and a data part.
  • FIG. 3 is a data structure diagram of a packet.
  • the header portion includes an address used for communication and a counter flag described later.
  • the data part includes an area for storing a control command, voice information, unit information to be described later, and a request flag to be described later.
  • the control command is, for example, a command by which CU1 instructs DU2 or a command by which CU1 as a master instructs as a slave.
  • the data part does not include a control command when there is no instruction from CU1 to DU2 or when there is no instruction from CU1 as a master to CU1 as a slave.
  • the audio information is information generated by DU 2 based on the audio signal from the microphone 3.
  • the voice information is stored in the data portion of the packet transmitted from DU2 to CU1.
  • the data unit includes a plurality of areas (hereinafter referred to as "voice areas") in which voice information is stored.
  • the voice area is a frame that defines the number of DUs 2 that can be simultaneously uttered among the plurality of DUs 2 included in the conference system S.
  • the number of speech areas included in the data section is the same as the maximum number of set talkers described later.
  • CU1 assigns an individual number (eg, 1, 2, 3,%) To each voice area. Details of the sound area will be described later.
  • connection unit 12 is an interface for connecting the other CU1 and DU2, the operation terminal 4, the external device 5, and the like.
  • the connection unit 12 includes an external device connection unit 12 a and a unit connection unit 12 b.
  • the external device connection unit 12a is, for example, an interface for connecting the operation terminal 4, the external device 5, a communication device, and the like.
  • the external device connection unit 12a is, for example, a USB (Universal Serial Bus) terminal, a network terminal, an analog input / output terminal, or the like.
  • the external device 5 is, for example, a USB memory, a microphone, a speaker, a translation system, or the like.
  • the communication device is a hub, a router, a wireless local area network (LAN) access point, or the like.
  • the unit connection unit 12 b is an interface connected to another CU 1 or DU 2.
  • the unit connection portion 12 b includes, for example, a first terminal, a second terminal, a third terminal, and a fourth terminal.
  • the first terminal and the second terminal are, for example, connection terminals that can be connected only to DU2.
  • the third terminal and the fourth terminal are, for example, connection terminals that can be connected to any of the other CU1 and DU2.
  • the configuration of the terminals of the unit connection portion 12b is not limited to this embodiment. That is, for example, the number of terminals may be "6".
  • the storage unit 13 stores information necessary for the CU 1 and DU 2 to realize information processing to be described later.
  • the storage unit 13 temporarily stores (stores) various types of information and programs, and is configured by a RAM (Read Access Memory), a ROM (Read Only Memory), a hard disk, and the like.
  • the information stored in the storage unit 13 is, for example, control information that controls the operation of the conference system S, such as the operation of CU1 and DU2.
  • the control information includes, for example, unit setting information, unit connection information, information on system setting of the conference system S described later, a speech request list, and the like.
  • the unit setting information is, for example, information on the setting of DU 2 connected to CU 1 in the past.
  • the unit setting information includes, for example, parameter information and mode information.
  • the unit setting information is stored in a unit setting information database (hereinafter referred to as "unit setting information DB").
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic view showing an example of information stored in the unit setting information DB.
  • the unit setting information DB is, for example, a database in which an absolute ID composed of a serial number of DU2 and unit setting information of DU2 are associated with each other and stored.
  • the unit setting information of DU2 is stored, for example, in the unit setting information DB by the system administrator via CU1. At this time, the unit setting information of DU2 is stored in the unit setting information DB in association with the absolute ID of DU2.
  • FIG. 4 shows that, for example, the absolute ID "A” and the unit setting information "X1" are associated with each other and stored in the unit setting information DB.
  • the parameter information includes, for example, setting information (for example, equalizer setting, volume setting, and the like) of the microphone 3 attached to DU2, information on the light emission state of the light emitting unit 28 described later, and setting information on priority described later. .
  • setting information for example, equalizer setting, volume setting, and the like
  • the mode information is information on the operating state of each DU 2.
  • the information regarding the operation state includes, for example, a conference mode described later, a microphone on trigger described later, and the like.
  • the unit connection information is information on the connection of DU 2 connected to CU 1.
  • the unit connection information is information on the connection method of the DU 2 connected to the CU 1 and the number of connected devices.
  • the unit connection information is stored in a unit connection information database (hereinafter referred to as "unit connection information DB").
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic view showing information stored in the unit connection information DB.
  • the unit connection information DB is a database in which information on connection of DU 2 connected to CU 1 is stored.
  • the unit connection information DB is created each time CU1 is activated.
  • the "terminal number” is the number of the terminal of the unit connection portion 12b.
  • the “connection method” indicates a connection method of DU 2 to the four terminals of the unit connection portion 12 b.
  • “Number” is the number of DU2 connected to each terminal.
  • the “relative ID” is an ID (for example, a consecutive number starting from 1) assigned relatively to each DU 2.
  • the “absolute ID” is an ID absolutely assigned to each DU 2.
  • the display unit 14 displays, for example, the volume of the entire conference system S, the recording status, the preset pattern, the alarm information, and the like.
  • the display unit 14 is a display represented by, for example, a liquid crystal display (LCD) or an organic electroluminescence (EL).
  • LCD liquid crystal display
  • EL organic electroluminescence
  • the operation unit 15 changes the display content displayed on the display unit 14 or the like.
  • the operation unit 15 is configured by, for example, a dial or a button.
  • the control unit 16 controls the operation of the CU 1, controls the operation of the DU 2 connected to the CU 1, and calculates and processes information.
  • the control unit 16 controls operations of the communication unit 11, the storage unit 13, the display unit 14, and the operation unit 15.
  • the control unit 16 is configured of, for example, a microprocessor such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) and a peripheral circuit thereof.
  • control unit 16 of CU1A controls CU1B and CU1C operations, and DU2B1-2B4 and DU2C1-2C4 operations It also controls the That is, the control unit 16 of the CU1 serving as the master also controls the operation of the CU1 serving as the slave and also controls the operation of the DU2 connected to the CU1 serving as the slave.
  • FIG. 6 is a perspective view of DU2.
  • FIG. 7 is a functional block diagram showing a hardware configuration of DU2.
  • FIG. 8 is a rear view of DU2.
  • the DU 2 generates voice information based on the voice signal input from the microphone 3 and transmits the voice information to the CU 1 and transmits from the CU 1 synthetic voice information (voice information transmitted by another DU 2 to the CU 1) described later. Receive and output sound waves.
  • the DU 2 is assigned, for example, to each participant of the conference.
  • DU2 is connected to CU1 and other DU2 via a communication line.
  • the DU 2 includes a housing 20, a communication unit 21, a connection unit 22, a storage unit 23, a display unit 24, an operation unit 25, a control unit 26, a speaker 27, and a light emitting unit 28. Become.
  • the housing 20 accommodates the communication unit 21, the storage unit 23, the control unit 26, and the speaker 27.
  • the housing 20 includes at least a first surface 20a and a second surface 20b.
  • the first surface 20 a is disposed on the front side of the housing 20.
  • the first surface 20 a is disposed at a position where it can be viewed by the user of DU 2 (hereinafter referred to as “user”) when DU 2 is used.
  • the first surface 20a includes a plurality of discharge holes 20ah.
  • the emission hole 20ah emits the sound wave from the speaker 27 to the outside of DU2.
  • the discharge holes 20ah are disposed on the first surface 20a.
  • the second surface 20 b is disposed on the back side of the housing 20.
  • the second surface 20b is disposed at a position (such as the rear surface of DU2) that is visible to other users of DU2 and the like (hereinafter referred to as "third party") when using DU2.
  • the communication unit 21 realizes communication with the CU 1.
  • the communication unit 21 performs, for example, communication conforming to IEEE 802.3.
  • the information transmitted and received by the communication unit 21 is, for example, audio information generated based on an audio signal from the microphone 3, unit setting information, audio information from another DU 2 or the like.
  • the connection unit 22 is connected to the CU 1, the other DU 2, the microphone 3, and the like.
  • the connection portion 22 includes a socket portion 22a and a unit connection portion 22b.
  • the socket 22a is a socket to which the microphone 3 is connected.
  • the socket portion 22a is, for example, a socket for a 3-pin plug defined in JEITA RC-5236 "Ratch lock type round connector for audio equipment".
  • the socket portion 22a is disposed on the first surface 20a.
  • the unit connection unit 22 b is an interface connected to the CU 1 or another DU 2.
  • the unit connection part 22b is provided with two terminals. Both terminals are connected to CU1 and other DU2 except DU2 which is the end of the daisy connection.
  • the communication unit 21 controls transmission and reception of information between the two terminals.
  • the storage unit 23 stores information necessary for the DU 2 to realize information processing described later.
  • the storage unit 23 includes, for example, a RAM, a ROM, and the like.
  • the storage unit 23 stores unit setting information and the like received by the communication unit 21.
  • the unit setting information stored in the storage unit 23 is, for example, parameter information of DU 2 or information for determining the light emission state of the light emitting unit 28 described later.
  • the display unit 24 displays, for example, the volume of a headphone (not shown) or the like connected to the DU 2 or a channel of a sub audio (for example, the audio of an interpreter).
  • the display unit 24 is a display represented by, for example, an LCD, an organic EL, or the like.
  • the display unit 24 is disposed on the first surface 20 a of the housing 20.
  • the operation unit 25 outputs a detection signal corresponding to the user's operation to the control unit 26.
  • the operation unit 25 includes an operation button 25a, a volume control button 25b, and a channel change button 25c.
  • the operation unit 25 is disposed on the first surface 20 a of the housing 20.
  • the operation button 25a is pressed by the user, for example, when the user makes a speech request to be described later.
  • the volume control button 25 b is operated by the user when the user adjusts the volume of headphones and the like connected to DU 2.
  • the channel change button 25c is operated by the user, for example, when changing the channel of the sub audio (such as an interpreter).
  • the control unit 26 processes the audio signal from the microphone 3, controls the operation of DU2, generates audio information, and the like.
  • the control unit 26 controls operations of the communication unit 21, the storage unit 23, the display unit 24, the operation unit 25, the speaker 27, and the light emitting unit 28.
  • the control unit 26 includes, for example, a microprocessor such as a CPU and its peripheral circuits.
  • the speaker 27 converts an audio signal from the communication unit 21 into a sound wave, and outputs the sound wave.
  • the sound wave from the speaker 27 is emitted from the emission hole 20ah of the first surface 20a to the outside of DU2.
  • the light emitting unit 28 emits light based on a signal from the control unit 26 to notify status information using light.
  • the light emitting unit 28 is, for example, a multi-color LED (Light-emitting diode). That is, the light emitting unit 28 can emit light in a plurality of colors.
  • the light emitting unit 28 includes a first light emitting unit 28 a and a second light emitting unit 28 b.
  • the status information is, for example, information indicating the operating state of the microphone 3 such as on / off of the microphone 3, information indicating the operating state of the DU 2 such as information indicating whether a speech request described later is being executed, group information described later Etc.
  • the speech request is to request that the microphone 3 be turned on to enable the user's speech.
  • a speech request is made from DU2 to CU1.
  • the first light emitting unit 28a notifies the user of the status information.
  • the first light emitting unit 28a is disposed on the operation button 25a.
  • the second light emitting unit 28 b notifies the third party of the status information.
  • the second light emitting unit 28 b is disposed on the second surface 20 b of the housing 20. That is, the second light emitting unit 28 b can be viewed from a third party.
  • the light emission state of the light emitting unit 28 is controlled by the control unit 26 based on the unit setting information.
  • the light emission state of the light emitting unit 28 includes a light emission pattern and a light emission color.
  • the light emission state of the light emitting unit 28 is stored in the storage unit 23 as unit setting information.
  • the light emission pattern includes a light off pattern, a lighting pattern, a blinking pattern, and a dimmer (light reduction) lighting pattern.
  • the luminescent color is selected from, for example, 10 colors set in advance by a system administrator or the like.
  • the light emitting unit 28 can display, for example, group information according to the difference in emission color.
  • the group information is, for example, information indicating contents divided into groups based on the affiliation (country, political party, etc.) of participants such as a conference, the language of the participants, the stage of priority described later, and the like. Therefore, for example, the system administrator can easily change the setting based on the light emission color of the second light emitting unit 28b.
  • Power to DU 2 is supplied from CU 1 to which each DU 2 is connected via a communication line cable.
  • FIG. 9 is a perspective view of DU 2 to which the microphone 3 is attached.
  • the microphone 3 picks up the user's voice (sound wave). That is, the microphone 3 converts sound waves into electrical signals.
  • the microphone 3 is, for example, a gooseneck condenser microphone.
  • the directivity of the microphone 3 is, for example, unidirectional.
  • the microphone 3 is attached to the socket 22a of DU2.
  • the power supply of the microphone 3 is supplied from DU 2 by, for example, a phantom power supply.
  • the microphone 3 picks up the voice in the "on” state and outputs a voice signal, and does not pick up the voice in the "off” state.
  • the microphone 3 may include, for example, a single color LED ring.
  • the power of the LED ring is supplied from DU2 through the socket 22a of DU2.
  • FIG. 10 is a functional block diagram showing a hardware configuration of the operation terminal 4.
  • the operation terminal 4 is a terminal that performs operation of the conference system S, setting of CU1, setting of DU2, remote control of CU1 and DU2, and the like.
  • the setting of CU 1 and the setting of DU 2 are performed, for example, by operating the operation terminal 4 by a system administrator or a chairperson of a conference.
  • the operation terminal 4 is, for example, a general-purpose information processing apparatus such as a PC (Personal Computer), a tablet terminal, and a smartphone.
  • the operation terminal 4 is connected to the CU 1 through the communication line, and is connected to the DU 2 through the CU 1 and the communication line.
  • the operation terminal 4 includes a communication unit 41, a storage unit 43, a display unit 44, an operation unit 45, and a control unit 46.
  • the communication unit 41 implements communication with the CU 1.
  • the communication unit 41 is an interface connected to the CU 1 via a communication network such as a LAN or a wide area network (WAN).
  • a communication network such as a LAN or a wide area network (WAN).
  • the storage unit 43 stores information necessary for the operation terminal 4 to realize information processing to be described later.
  • the storage unit 43 includes, for example, a RAM, a ROM, a hard disk, and the like.
  • the information stored in the storage unit 43 includes various databases read from the CU 1 and a speech request list described later.
  • the display unit 44 displays an operation screen of the conference system S, various databases, a speech request list, and the like according to an instruction (control) from the control unit 46.
  • the display unit 44 is, for example, a display such as an LCD.
  • the operation unit 45 outputs, to the control unit 46, a detection signal corresponding to the operation of the operation terminal 4 by a system administrator or the like.
  • the operation unit 45 is, for example, a keyboard, a mouse, a software keyboard, and the like.
  • the control unit 46 controls the operation of the operation terminal 4.
  • the control unit 46 is configured of, for example, a microprocessor such as a CPU and its peripheral circuits.
  • the operation terminal 4 may not be a general-purpose information processing terminal, and may be a terminal dedicated to a conference system.
  • the conference system S may include at least CU1, DU2, and the microphone 3. That is, for example, the conference system S may not include the operation terminal 4.
  • Priority Priority is, for example, information that a system administrator sets for each DU 2 via the CU 1 and is a so-called priority right regarding the restriction of the function of the DU 2.
  • the priority-set DU 2 is always assigned a voice slot and the above-mentioned voice area, and is controlled to be able to speak.
  • the speech-enabled DU 2 can turn on the microphone 3 to transmit voice information to the CU 1.
  • the setting of the priority for each DU 2 that can speak is stored in the unit setting information DB of the storage unit 13.
  • the voice slot is a frame that defines the number of DUs 2 that can simultaneously speak among the plurality of DUs 2 included in the conference system S.
  • the conference system S includes the same number of voice slots as the maximum number of set talkers, which will be described later, that is, the same number as the number of voice areas described above.
  • the conference system S assigns an individual number (for example, 1, 2, 3,%) To each voice slot.
  • the voice slot is provided, for example, in the control unit 16 of CU1.
  • CU1 allocates an audio slot and an audio area for each DU2 that permits speech. That is, CU1 assigns the number of the voice slot and the number of the voice area for each DU2 that permits speech.
  • the DU 2 to which the voice slot and the voice area are assigned can be uttered.
  • the CU 1 stores the number assigned to the voice slot and the number assigned to the voice area in the storage unit 13 in association with each other.
  • the CU 1 assigns a voice slot and a voice area to the DU 2, associates the assigned voice slot number with the voice area number, and performs voice information synthesis processing described later.
  • a plurality of voice areas included in the data portion of one packet are respectively assigned to different DUs.
  • CU1 receives one packet in which voice information from a plurality of DU2s is stored.
  • the CU 1 specifies the DU 2 that has generated the voice information by the number of the voice area in which the voice information is stored.
  • CU1 identifies the number assigned to the voice slot based on the number assigned to the voice area. That is, CU1 specifies the voice slot and voice area corresponding to each of DU2 which can be uttered by the voice slot number and the voice area number.
  • the CU 1 receives the voice information stored in the voice area of the received packet via the voice slot corresponding to the voice area.
  • CU1 transmits voice information received from a certain DU2 to all DU2s connected to CU1 including that DU2.
  • the conference system S limits the number of DUs 2 that can simultaneously speak to reduce the information processing load of the conference system S and reduce the traffic of the network.
  • the maximum number of DU2 that can be uttered at the same time (hereinafter referred to as “maximum speaker set number”) is determined based on, for example, the setting of CU1 as the master.
  • the maximum speaker setting number is determined to be a predetermined number in the conference system S regardless of the number of connected CU1.
  • the speech-enabled DU2 is a DU2 to which a voice slot and a voice area are assigned.
  • the number of DU2 (DU2 which can always speak) to which the priority is set is set to be smaller than the maximum speaker setting number. This is because the conference system S secures a space between the audio slot and the audio area so that it can also receive an utterance request from DU 2 for which priority is not set.
  • the priority right of DU 2 to which the priority is set is divided into four levels of priority: first right, second right, third right, and fourth right. These authorities are determined, for example, by a combination of whether or not batch muting of another DU 2 is possible and whether or not to be a target of batch muting from another DU 2.
  • the first right is a priority right that can be muted and not subject to collective muting.
  • the first right is the highest right, and is set to DU2 assigned to, for example, the chairperson of the conference.
  • the second right is a priority right that can be batch muted and is subject to batch muting.
  • the second authority is set to, for example, DU2 assigned to the deputy chairperson of the conference.
  • the third right is a priority right that can not be batch muted and is not subject to batch muting.
  • the fourth right is a priority right that can not be batch muted and is subject to batch muting.
  • the breakdown of the priority can be appropriately set in accordance with the authority of the user of DU2.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing information processing of the conference system S including one CU. After the conference system S is started, the conference system S executes an initialization process (S1), a DU information acquisition process (S2), a DU setting process (S3), and an operation process (S4).
  • S1 an initialization process
  • S2 a DU information acquisition process
  • S3 a DU setting process
  • S4 an operation process
  • the CU 1 transmits packets from all the terminals of the unit connection unit 12 b. Therefore, in the case of ring connection, a packet is sent to DU2 from the bidirectional of the two terminals to which DU2 is connected.
  • the forward direction is the direction in which packets flow from the smaller-numbered terminal of the terminals of the CU 1 connected in a ring to the larger-numbered terminal.
  • the reverse direction is the direction opposite to the forward direction.
  • Information of various packets received by each terminal is synthesized by the control unit 16 of CU1.
  • the information from one of the terminals is muted (ignored) and is not used for synthesis by the control unit 16. Therefore, duplication due to combining information from both directions is eliminated.
  • DU2 receives a packet at one of the two terminals (referred to as “a") and transmits the packet from the other terminal (referred to as "b").
  • Terminal (b) which transmits packets in the forward direction, receives packets in the reverse direction
  • terminal (a) which receives packets in the forward direction, transmits packets in the reverse direction.
  • DU2A1 is connected to the first terminal of CU1A
  • DU2A4 is connected to the second terminal of CU1A.
  • the initialization process (S1) initializes the unit setting (information) of DU2 connected to CU1, and the conference system S recognizes the connection method of DU2 connected to CU1 and the number of connected devices (S1). Processing).
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the information processing of the CU 1A in the initialization process (S1).
  • FIG. 13 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in the initialization process (S1).
  • the control unit 16 of the CU 1 A transmits, to the communication unit 11, an initialization command for initializing DU 2 A 1 to 2 A 4.
  • the communication unit 11 transmits the initialization packet carrying (including) the initialization command from the first terminal to DU 2 A 1 (S 11 a).
  • the packet includes a counter flag in the head.
  • the counter flag is information in which the count value is incremented ("1" is added) by DU2 which has received the packet each time the packet is transmitted to DU2.
  • the control unit 16 resets the count value of the counter flag included in the packet to be transmitted to DU 2 to initialize it. That is, the count value of the counter flag of the initialization packet transmitted from CU1A to DU2A1 is “0”.
  • the DU 2 A 1 having received the initialization packet initializes the unit setting according to the initialization command, that is, updates the unit setting information of the storage unit 23 to the initial value.
  • the control unit 26 of DU 2 A 1 having received the initialization packet increments the count value of the counter flag (S 12 a).
  • the communication unit 21 of DU2A1 transmits the initialization packet whose count value of the counter flag is “1” to DU2A2.
  • the DU 2 A 2 having received the initialization packet initializes the unit setting according to the initialization command, that is, updates the unit setting information of the storage unit 23 to the initial value.
  • the control unit 26 of DU 2 A 2 having received the initialization packet increments the count value of the counter flag (S 13 a).
  • the communication unit 21 of DU2A2 transmits the initialization packet whose count value of the counter flag is “2” to DU2A3.
  • the DU 2 A 3 having received the initialization packet initializes the unit setting according to the initialization command, that is, updates the unit setting information of the storage unit 23 to the initial value.
  • the control unit 26 of DU 2 A 3 having received the initialization packet increments the count value of the counter flag (S 14 a).
  • the communication unit 21 of DU2A3 transmits the initialization packet whose count value of the counter flag is "3" to DU2A4.
  • the DU 2 A 4 having received the initialization packet initializes the unit setting according to the initialization command, that is, updates the unit setting information of the storage unit 23 to the initial value.
  • the control unit 26 of DU 2 A 4 having received the initialization packet increments the count value of the counter flag (S 15 a).
  • the communication unit 21 of DU 2 A 4 transmits the initialization packet whose count value of the counter flag is “4” to the second terminal of CU 1 A.
  • the communication unit 11 receives the initialization packet from DU 2 A 4 via the second terminal (S 16 a).
  • the initialization packet (the initial value of the counter flag is “0”) is also transmitted in the reverse direction from the second terminal.
  • FIG. 14 is another sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in the initialization process (S1).
  • the initialization packet is transmitted from the second terminal of CU1A in the reverse direction in the order of DU2A4, DU2A3, DU2A2, DU2A1, and CU1 first terminal.
  • the communication unit 11 transmits the initialization packet carrying the initialization command from the second terminal to DU 2 A 4 (S 11 b).
  • the DU 2 A 4 initializes the unit setting and increments the count value of the counter flag (S 12 b).
  • the DU 2 A 3 initializes the unit setting and increments the count value of the counter flag (S 13 b).
  • the DU 2 A 2 initializes the unit setting and increments the count value of the counter flag (S 14 b).
  • the DU 2 A 1 initializes the unit setting and increments the count value of the counter flag (S 15 b).
  • the communication unit 11 receives the initialization packet from DU 2 A 1 via the first terminal (S 16 b).
  • the control unit 16 stores information such as the count value of the counter flag included in the initialization packet received by the communication unit 11 in the storage unit 13.
  • FIG. 15 is a sequence diagram showing information processing after receiving the initialization packet of the conference system S in the initialization processing (S1).
  • the control unit 16 recognizes the connection state of DU 2 for each terminal, that is, the connection method of DU 2 and the number of connected terminals (S 17).
  • the recognition of the connection method of the DU 2 is performed, for example, based on whether or not the terminals of the unit connection unit 12 b that transmitted and received the packet match (difference in terminal number). That is, when the terminal that has transmitted the packet and the terminal that has received the packet match, the connection method of DU 2 is daisy connection. On the other hand, when the terminal that has transmitted the packet and the terminal that has received the packet do not match, the connection method of DU 2 is ring connection.
  • the forward initialization packet for DU2A1-2A4 is sent from the first terminal of CU1A and received at the second terminal. That is, the terminal number at which the CU 1A has transmitted the initialization packet does not match (different from) the terminal number at which the CU 1A has received the initialization packet.
  • the terminal (second terminal) number at which CU1A transmitted the initialization packet does not match the terminal (first terminal) number at which CU1A received the initialization packet (different) ). Therefore, the control unit 16 recognizes that the connection method of the DU 2 A 1-2 A 4 is ring connection.
  • the number of connected DU2 is recognized by the count value of the counter flag of the initialization packet transmitted / received by all the terminals. That is, for example, the initialization packet transmitted between the first terminal and the second terminal of CU1A returns to CU1A when the count value of the counter flag is "4". Therefore, the control unit 16 recognizes that the number of DU2 connected between the first terminal and the second terminal is "4". Thus, the counter flag included in the packet is used to count the number of DU2 connected to CU1.
  • the control unit 16 When the control unit 16 recognizes the connection method and the number of connected DUs, the control unit 16 generates an ID of each DU 2 (hereinafter referred to as “relative ID”) (S18).
  • the relative ID is assigned, for example, sequentially from the DU 2 connected to the small terminal number side of the unit connection portion 12 b and assigned to each DU 2. That is, for example, the relative ID of DU2A1 is “1”, and the relative ID of DU2A4 is “4”.
  • the control unit 16 associates the recognized connection method and the number of connected DUs with the assigned relative ID, and stores them in the unit connection information DB of the storage unit 13 (S19).
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic view showing information stored in the storage unit 13 of the CU 1 after the initialization process (S1). This figure shows that the third and fourth terminals of CU1 are not connected to DU2 and not connected.
  • connection method of DU2 is a daisy connection
  • the terminal DU2 is the terminal DU because there is no reception from one of the two terminals of the DU2.
  • the terminal DU 2 attaches a flag (hereinafter referred to as “loopback flag”) to the effect that it is a loop back to the initialization packet, and loops back the initialization packet. That is, DU 2 transmits and receives information bidirectionally regardless of the connection method.
  • DU2 does not increment the count value of the counter flag of the initialization packet to which the return flag is added.
  • control unit 16 recognizes the number of connected DUs 2 based on the count value of the counter flag.
  • the control unit 16 recognizes that the connection method of the DU 2 is a daisy connection because the terminal numbers of the unit connection unit 12 b that transmitted and received the initialization packet match.
  • the DU information acquisition process (S2) is a process of acquiring unit information of DU2.
  • the unit information is, for example, the serial number (absolute ID) of DU 2 or a MAC (Media Access Control) address.
  • the processing in the forward direction is the same as the processing in the reverse direction, and thus the description of the processing in the reverse direction is omitted.
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing information processing of the CU 1A in DU information acquisition processing (S2).
  • FIG. 18 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in DU information acquisition processing (S2).
  • the control unit 16 transmits, to the communication unit 11, an information acquisition command for acquiring the unit information of DU 2 A 1-2 A 4.
  • the communication unit 11 transmits an information acquisition packet carrying an information acquisition command to each DU 2 A 1-1 A 4 (S 21 a -S 21 d).
  • the information acquisition packet is addressed by relative ID. Therefore, only the addressed DU 2 receives the information acquisition packet.
  • Each DU 2 A 1-2 A 4 that has received the information acquisition command transmits an information acquisition packet carrying unit information to the CU 1 A according to the information acquisition command (S 22 a-S 22 d).
  • the communication unit 11 receives the information acquisition packet from each of the DUs 2A1-2A4 (S23a-S23d).
  • the control unit 16 reads unit information from the information acquisition packet received by the communication unit 11.
  • the control unit 16 acquires an absolute ID from the unit information (S24).
  • the control unit 16 associates the acquired absolute ID and relative ID with each other, and stores the unit connection information DB of the storage unit 13 (S25). Since the control unit 16 has acquired the absolute ID, it becomes possible to specify the address of DU 2 using the absolute ID in the processing after the DU information acquisition processing (S 2).
  • the control unit 16 reads the unit setting information DB from the storage unit 13, and the absolute ID of the DU2 and the setting information (initial The unit setting information DB is stored in association with the value).
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic view showing information stored in the storage unit 13 of the CU 1 after the DU information acquisition processing.
  • relative IDs “1” “2” “3” “4” of four DU2 ring-connected to terminal numbers “1” “2” are absolute IDs “A” “B” “C” “ Indicates that it is associated with “D”.
  • the CU 1 can notify, for example, the system administrator via the operation terminal 4 etc., information indicating which relative ID the DU 2 of which absolute ID is connected to which relative ID It becomes. Therefore, the system administrator can, for example, operate the operation terminal 4 to associate the absolute ID with the user name (proper noun) of DU2 and store the same in the storage unit 13, and the proper noun DU2. It can manage. Further, the system administrator associates the relative ID with the user name of DU 2 and stores the same in the storage unit 13, for example, to display the proper noun for each seat of the conference room in the display unit 44 of the operation terminal 4 or the like. It can be displayed.
  • the conference system S executes a DU setting process (S3).
  • the DU setting process (S3) is a process of setting DU2 based on the unit setting information DB.
  • the processing in the forward direction is the same as the processing in the reverse direction, and thus the description of the processing in the reverse direction is omitted.
  • FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing information processing of CU 1 A in DU setting processing (S 3).
  • FIG. 21 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in DU setting processing (S3).
  • the control unit 16 reads the unit setting information DB from the storage unit 13 (S31), and transmits a unit setting command for setting DU2 to the communication unit 11.
  • the communication unit 11 transmits the setting packet carrying the unit setting command to each of the DU 2 A 1-2 A 4 (S 32 a -S 32 d).
  • the setup packet includes the absolute ID of DU2 as the destination of the packet. That is, the transmission destination of the setting packet is addressed by the absolute ID. Therefore, among DUs 2 connected to CU 1, only the addressed DU 2 receives the configuration packet.
  • Each DU 2 A 1-2 A 4 having received the setting packet changes the unit setting according to the unit setting command (S 33 a -S 33 d).
  • Each DU 2 A 1-2 A 4 updates the unit setting information of the storage unit 23.
  • the unit setting is information defining an operation for each DU 2 such as setting of priority, setting of microphone on trigger described later, setting of light emission color of the light emitting unit 28, and the like.
  • the communication unit 11 receives the setting packet from each DU 2 A 1-2 A 4 whose unit setting has been changed (S 34 a-S 34 d). At this time, the setting packet includes information indicating that each DU 2 A 1-2 A 4 has correctly acquired a command.
  • the operation processing (S4) periodically transmits the operation packet from CU1 to DU2 periodically (for example, every 166 ⁇ s), executes various commands carried in the operation packet, and monitors the connection status of DU2 by the counter flag. Processing.
  • the various commands are, for example, voice acquisition commands.
  • the voice acquisition command is a command for acquiring voice information from DU 2 to which CU 1 is assigned a voice slot and a voice area.
  • the operation packet may not carry (do not include) the control command. Even in this case, the operation packet is repeatedly transmitted and received between CU1 and DU2. That is, CU ⁇ b> 1 monitors the connection state of DU ⁇ b> 2 using the counter flag included in the operation packet regardless of the presence or absence of the control command.
  • FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing information processing of the CU 1A in the operation processing (S4).
  • FIG. 23 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in the operation processing (S4).
  • the operation processing (S4) will be described by taking acquisition of voice information from DU 2 A 2 to which a voice slot and a voice area are allocated as an example. The assignment of voice slots and voice areas will be described later.
  • the control unit 16 transmits a voice acquisition command to the communication unit 11.
  • the communication unit 11 transmits the operation packet carrying the voice acquisition command to the DU 2 A 2 to which the voice slot and the voice area are assigned (S 41).
  • the communication unit 21 of DU 2 A 2 that has received the operation packet places the voice information in the voice area of the number assigned to itself among the voice area of the operation packet according to the voice acquisition command and transmits it to CU 1 A (S 42).
  • the count value of the counter flag is reset in CU 1 A and incremented in each DU 2 A 1-2 A 4 as in the initialization process (S 1).
  • the CU 1A receives the operation packet from the DU 2 A 2 (S 43).
  • the communication unit 11 transmits information such as the count value of the counter flag and the voice information received by all the terminals of the unit connection unit 12 b to the control unit 16.
  • the voice information is received by the voice slot of the same number as the voice area number in which the voice information is stored. The processing of voice information will be described later.
  • the control unit 16 confirms (specifies) the connection state (connection method and number of connected units) of the DU 2 from the count value of the counter flag and the terminal number that has transmitted and received the operation packet (S44). This confirmation is performed each time the communication unit 11 receives an operation packet.
  • the confirmation of the number of connected DUs is referred to as the newly acquired count value of the counter flag (hereinafter referred to as “new DU count value”) and the count value stored in the storage unit 13 (hereinafter referred to as “old DU count value”). Is performed by comparing. That is, when the new DU count value matches the old DU count value, the control unit 16 determines that there is no change in the number of connected DUs. On the other hand, when the new DU count value and the old DU count value do not match (when they do not match), the control unit 16 determines that there is a change in the number of connected DUs.
  • the confirmation of the connection method of DU 2 is performed by comparing the terminal number of the terminal that has transmitted the operation packet with the terminal number of the terminal that has received the operation packet. That is, when the terminal numbers of the terminals that have transmitted and received the operation packet match, the control unit 16 determines that the connection method of DU 2 is daisy connection. On the other hand, when the terminal numbers of the terminals that have transmitted and received the operation packet do not match (when they do not match), the control unit 16 determines that the connection method of DU 2 is ring connection.
  • the control unit 16 reads the unit connection information DB from the storage unit 13, and compares the connection method of DU2 stored in the unit connection information DB with the connection method of DU2 newly acquired. The control unit 16 determines that there is no change in the connection method of DU2 when both connection methods coincide (same), and determines that there is a change in the connection method of DU2 when both connection methods do not match (different).
  • the control unit 16 determines that there is a change in the connection state of DU 2 when it determines that there is a change in either the number of connected DU 2 or the connection method of DU 2. That is, when the new DU count value and the old DU count value do not match, the control unit 16 determines that there is a change in the connection state of DU2. On the other hand, when determining that there is no change in any of the control units 16, the control unit 16 determines that there is no change in the connection state of DU2.
  • FIG. 24 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S when there is a change in the connection state of DU2.
  • the figure shows an example in which the connection abnormality occurs due to a failure or removal of DU 2 A 3.
  • This figure shows only forward processing of the operation packet not carrying a command, for convenience of explanation.
  • the communication unit 11 of the CU 1 A transmits an operation packet to the DU 2 A 1 through the first terminal (S 41 a).
  • the DU 2 A 1 increments the count value of the counter flag of the received operation packet (S 42 a), and transmits the operation packet to the DU 2 A 2.
  • the DU 2 A 2 increments the count value of the counter flag of the received operation packet (S 42 b).
  • DU 2 A 2 When a connection abnormality occurs in DU 2 A 3, DU 2 A 2 recognizes that it has become the terminal DU 2 because there is no reception of an operation packet from one terminal (in the reverse direction). Therefore, DU 2 A 2 adds (puts on) the return flag to the operation packet (S 42 c). The DU 2 A 2 transmits, to the CU 1 A, the operation packet to which the return flag is added via the DU 2 A 1. At this time, since the return packet is attached to the operation packet, the DU 2 A 1 transmits and receives only the operation packet without incrementing the count value of the counter flag as described above.
  • the DU 2 A 4 transmits the operation packet to which the return flag is added to the CU 1 A (not shown) in the reverse direction processing, similarly to the DU 2 A 2.
  • the control unit 16 of the CU 1 A recognizes the change of the connection method of DU 2 A 1-2 A 4 (change from ring connection to daisy connection) because the terminal numbers of the terminals through which the operation packet is transmitted and received are the same.
  • the control unit 16 recognizes a change in the number of connected DUs 2 connected to the same terminal from the comparison result of the count value of the counter flag of the operation packet.
  • the control unit 16 collates the recognition result with the unit connection information DB to recognize a change in the connection state of the DU 2 A 1-2 A 4 (S 44).
  • the control unit 16 connects to DU 2 A 3 from the count value “2” of the counter flag of the operation packet received by the first terminal and the count value “1” of the counter flag of the operation packet received by the second terminal. Recognize that an anomaly has occurred. As described above, when a connection abnormality occurs, the CU 1A immediately recognizes the occurrence of the connection abnormality and identifies the connection abnormality point.
  • the control unit 16 stores the voice information received by all the terminals in the voice slot and the information stored in the storage unit 13 in association with the absolute ID of DU2. And are synthesized (processed) to generate synthesized speech information (S45).
  • the synthesis of the voice information is performed by combining the voice information stored in the voice area of the same number in the voice area of each operation packet received by all the terminals.
  • the synthetic speech information includes, for example, information of the user (speaker) of DU 2 associated with the absolute ID, time information, group information and the like.
  • the synthetic speech information is stored in, for example, a USB memory connected to the external device connection unit 12a of the CU 1A, and is also transmitted to each DU 2 A 1-2 A 4.
  • the synthesized voice information transmitted to each DU 2 A 1-2 A 4 is processed by the control unit 26 of each DU 2 A 1-2 A 4, then converted into a sound wave by the speaker 27 and output from the speaker 27.
  • control unit 16 When generating synthetic speech information, the control unit 16 confirms the presence or absence of the request flag of the operation packet (S46). The request flag will be described later.
  • the conference system S executes request processing (S6).
  • the conference system S repeats the operation process (S4).
  • the change process (S5) is a process of updating the unit connection information stored in the unit connection information DB after the change of the connection state of DU2 to prevent the loss of voice information and the defect in the synthesis process of voice information.
  • FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing information processing of the CU 1A in the change process (S5).
  • the change process (S5) updates the unit connection information stored in the unit connection information DB, the initialization process (S1), the DU information acquisition process (S2), and the DU setting process (S3). It is a process to be executed again.
  • FIG. 26 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S as an example of the initialization process (S1) in the change process (S5). This figure shows a state in which the connection abnormality has occurred due to a failure or removal of DU 2 A 3. The figure shows only forward processing for the convenience of description.
  • the communication unit 11 of CU1A transmits the initialization packet to DU2A1 through the first terminal, and transmits the initialization packet to DU2A4 through the second terminal.
  • the initialization packet from the first terminal is folded back at DU2A2.
  • the DU 2 A 2 attaches a return flag to the initialization packet (S 131 a).
  • the initialization packet from the second terminal is folded back at DU 2 A 4 (not shown).
  • DU 2 A 4 assigns a return flag to the initialization packet (not shown).
  • the communication unit 11 receives the initialization packet from the DU 2 A 1 through the first terminal (S 16 a), and receives the initialization packet from the DU 2 A 4 through the second terminal.
  • the control unit 16 stores the new DU count value in the storage unit 13. At this time, the control unit 16 updates the old DU count value with the new DU count value.
  • the control unit 16 recognizes the connection state of DU 2 for each terminal of CU 1, that is, the connection method of DU 2 and the number of connected terminals (S 17).
  • the connection method of DU 2 A 1 and DU 2 A 2 connected to the first terminal of CU 1 and the connection method of DU 2 A 4 connected to the second terminal are daisy connection since the terminals that transmitted and received the initialization packet are the same.
  • the connected number of DU2 connected to the first terminal is two
  • the connected number of DU2 connected to the second terminal is one.
  • control unit 16 When the control unit 16 recognizes the connection method and the number of connected DU 2, the control unit 16 generates a relative ID of each DU 2 (S 18).
  • the control unit 16 associates the connection method of DU 2, the number of connected devices, and the relative ID, and stores them in the unit connection information DB of the storage unit 13 (S 19). As a result, the connection state of DU 2 stored in the unit connection information DB of the storage unit 13 and the association between the relative ID and the absolute ID are updated. As described above, when the new DU count value and the old DU count value do not match, the control unit 16 updates the association between the relative ID and the absolute ID. When the two connection methods are different, the control unit 16 updates the connection method of DU 2 stored in the storage unit 13.
  • the processing contents of DU information acquisition processing (S2) and DU setting processing (S3) are the same as the processing contents of DU information acquisition processing (FIG. 17) and DU setting processing (FIG. 20) described above.
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of information stored in the unit connection state DB after the change process. This figure shows that the DU 2 A 3 is eliminated and the relative ID of DU 2 A 4 is changed from “4” to “3” as compared with FIG. As described above, when the relative ID is changed, the association between the absolute ID and the relative ID is updated, so that the problem of the synthesizing process of the audio information before and after the change of the connection state of DU 2 does not occur.
  • the relative ID of DU2 may not be updated, and only the connection method of DU2 may be updated.
  • the request process (S6) is a process of executing command management up to assignment of DU2 to a voice slot when there is a speech request from DU2.
  • the request flag is not a command itself, but is a bit of on / off of a fixed length bit added to the operation packet by the operation of the user when the user of DU 2 makes a speech request.
  • the request flag is added to the operation packet by the control unit 26 of DU2.
  • the addition of the request flag is performed by processing the bit of the request flag (for example, setting the bit to “1” when on, setting the bit to “0” when off) in DU 2 .
  • the DU 2 to which the request flag is assigned is in a state of waiting for a command from the CU 1 (a state of waiting for a request).
  • the operation packet to which the request flag is assigned is transmitted from the communication unit 21 of DU2 to CU1A.
  • the user's operation is performed by either an operation by pressing the operation button 25a (hereinafter referred to as “manual trigger”) or an operation by the user's voice (hereinafter referred to as “automatic trigger”). That is, the manual trigger and the automatic trigger are triggers for turning on the microphone 3.
  • the request waiting state DU2 is a state in which the communication unit 21 can not transmit voice information to the CU 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “transmission impossible state”).
  • DU2 in a state where a request for speech (request) is permitted to CU1 (hereinafter referred to as "a state where speech is possible”) can transmit voice information to CU1 by communication unit 21 (hereinafter referred to as a "possible state for transmission”) ).
  • FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the information processing of the CU 1A in the request processing (S6).
  • FIG. 29 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in request processing (S6). This figure shows only the sequence of CU1A and DU2A1 for convenience of explanation.
  • the control unit 16 of the CU 1A incorporates the request flag into the request flag register (storage unit 13) (S61). At this time, the control unit 16 fetches the request flag but does not send a command to DU2. By this processing, since the request flag is taken into the register (storage unit 13), omission in reception (dropping) of the speech request on the hardware is eliminated.
  • control unit 16 performs mask processing on the bits corresponding to the fetched request flag (S62).
  • the request flag in the request flag register is protected, that is, the request flag can not be rewritten. As a result, false detection of the request flag is prevented.
  • control unit 16 confirms, for example, whether or not the request from the chairperson or the system administrator is rejected (S63). If the request is rejected ("Yes" in S63), the control unit 16 releases the mask (S71).
  • control unit 16 If the request is not rejected ("No" in S63), the control unit 16 confirms the presence or absence of a space between the voice slot and the voice area (S64). When there is a space between the voice slot and the voice area (“YES” in S64), the control unit 16 transmits an acquisition command for acquiring the content of the request to the communication unit 11. The communication unit 11 transmits the content acquisition packet carrying the acquisition command to DU 2 A 1 (S 65).
  • the communication unit 21 of DU 2 A 1 having received the content acquisition packet places the content of the request (utterance request) on the content acquisition packet and transmits it to the CU 1 A (S 67).
  • the DU 2 A 1 transmits the contents of the request to the CU 1 A and clears the request flag (turns off the bit for the request flag) (S 66).
  • the request flag may be cleared not by DU2 but by CU1.
  • the communication unit 11 receives the content acquisition packet (S68), and transmits the content of the request to the control unit 16. After acquiring the content of the request, the control unit 16 cancels the mask (S69), and allocates an audio slot and an audio area to DU2A1 (S70). Thereafter, the speech request from DU 2 A 1 is permitted.
  • the control unit 26 of the DU 2 A 1 switches the state of the communication unit 21 from the transmission disabled state to the transmission enabled state. That is, DU 2 A 1 is in the speech enable state.
  • the control unit 16 waits for the voice slot and the voice area to be free (does not perform any processing on DU2A1). At this time, DU 2 A 1 automatically enters a request waiting state.
  • the state of the communication unit 21 of DU 2 A 1 is the transmission disabled state.
  • the conference system S returns to the operation process (S4) after one of the processes of allocating the DU2 to the audio slot and the audio area (S70) and releasing the mask (S71).
  • the conference system S takes in the speech request from DU 2 by processing of the request flag periodically, and makes CU 1 transmit the content acquisition command to DU 2 only when the audio slot and the audio area are free. That is, the conference system S does not transmit a command each time a speech request is made. Therefore, the conference system S does not impose an excessive load of information processing even if a plurality of DUs 2 request speech at a time.
  • DU 2 which has made a speech request automatically enters a request waiting state. Therefore, the conference system S does not have to respond to all the speech requests from DU 2 and the load of information processing is reduced.
  • the speech request from DU 2 is made by processing the bits of the request flag, not the command. Therefore, the area occupied by the request flag in the packet can be, for example, several bytes. As a result, the load on the information processing of the conference system S in response to the speech request is reduced.
  • the flow of request processing in the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment. That is, for example, the confirmation of the space between the voice slot and the voice area (S64) may be performed after transmission and reception of the content acquisition packet.
  • FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing another information processing of CU 1 A in request processing.
  • the request process (S6a) shown in the figure is shown in FIG. 28 except that the confirmation (S64a) of the space between the voice slot and the voice area is executed immediately before the assignment (S70) of the voice slot and the voice area.
  • the request process (S6a) shown in the figure the process of fetching the request flag (S61), the mask process (S62), the process of confirming the rejection of the request (S63), and the request is rejected (S63).
  • the process of “Yes” (S71) and the process of assigning the voice slot to the voice area (S70) are the same as the request process (S6) shown in FIG.
  • control unit 16 transmits an acquisition command to the communication unit 11.
  • the communication unit 11 transmits the content acquisition packet carrying the acquisition command to DU 2 A 1 (S 65 a).
  • the DU 2 A 1 Upon receiving the content acquisition packet, the DU 2 A 1 clears the request flag (S 66), places the content of the request (utterance request) in the content acquisition packet, and transmits it to the CU 1 A (S 67).
  • the communication unit 11 receives the content acquisition packet (S 68 a), and transmits the content of the request to the control unit 16. After acquiring the content of the request, the control unit 16 cancels the mask (S69a), and confirms the free space between the audio slot and the audio area (S64a). If there is a space between the voice slot and the voice area ("Yes" in S64a), the control unit 16 assigns DU2A1 to the voice slot and the voice area (S70). At this time, DU 2 A 1 is in the speech enable state. On the other hand, when there is no space between the audio / speech slot and the voice area ("No" in S64a), the control unit 16 waits for the audio slot and the audio area to be free.
  • the flow of each process of the conference system according to the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment. That is, for example, the conference system S may execute each processing by appropriate parallel processing instead of series processing.
  • the various packets transmitted from CU1 to DU2 include a counter flag and a request flag. That is, monitoring of the connection state of DU 2 by incrementing the counter flag is always performed in various packets transmitted from CU 1 to DU 2 regardless of the presence or absence of a command.
  • the request flag can always be assigned in various packets transmitted from CU1 to DU2.
  • the light emission state of the light emitting unit 28 of DU 2 changes in accordance with the operation state of DU 2 during request processing (S 6). That is, for example, the light emission pattern of the light emitting unit 28 is a blinking pattern when DU2 is in a request waiting state (transmission disabled state), and is a lighting pattern when DU2 is in an utterance enabled state (transmission enabled state).
  • the request for DU2 is rejected, only the first light emitting unit 28a of the light emitting unit 28 blinks at a shorter interval than the blinking pattern in the request waiting state, and notifies only the user that the request is rejected.
  • the light emission pattern of the light emitting unit 28 of DU2 to which the request flag is not assigned indicates a light off pattern or a dimmer lighting pattern.
  • the light emitting unit 28 functions as a notifying unit that visually notifies the operating condition of DU2.
  • FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing information processing of the conference system S including a plurality of CUs.
  • the conference system S After the conference system S is activated, the conference system S performs an initialization process (S1), a CU connection status confirmation process (S101), a DU information acquisition process (S2), a slave CU information acquisition process (S102), and a slave DU initialization process (S103), slave DU information acquisition process (S104), DB information acquisition process of slave CU (S105), DU setting process (S3), slave DU setting process (S106), priority re-execution
  • the setting process (S107) and the operation process (S4) are executed.
  • the slave CU is CU1 set as a slave.
  • the slave DU is DU2 connected to CU1 set as a slave.
  • the flow of each process of the conference system according to the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment. That is, for example, the conference system S may execute each processing by appropriate parallel processing instead of series processing.
  • CU1A of FIG. 1 (hereinafter referred to as “master CU”), DU2A1-2A4 connected to the master CU (hereinafter referred to as “master DU), and CU1B connected to the master CU (hereinafter referred to as“ slave CU ”) And a DU 2 B 1-2 B 4 (hereinafter referred to as “slave DU”) connected to the slave CU will be described as an example.
  • the master DU is ring-connected to the first terminal and the second terminal of the master CU via a communication line.
  • the slave DU is ring-connected to the first terminal and the second terminal of the slave CU via a communication line.
  • the slave CU is connected to the third terminal of the master CU.
  • the master CU (CU1A) is set as a master, for example, by changing CU unit information described later by a system administrator or the like.
  • the slave CU (CU1B) is set as a slave, for example, by changing CU unit information described later by a system administrator or the like. Control of the conferencing system S comprising a plurality of CUs is performed by the master CU.
  • the conference system S executes an initialization process (S1) of the master DU connected to the master CU.
  • the initialization process (S1) is the same as the initialization process (FIG. 12) described above.
  • the conference system S executes a CU connection state confirmation process (S101).
  • the CU connection state confirmation process (S101) is a process of recognizing the connection method of another CU1 connected to CU1 and the number of connected CUs.
  • CU connection state confirmation processing (S101) is repeatedly performed during operation of the conference system S.
  • FIG. 32 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in the CU connection state confirmation processing.
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU transmits a CU connection state confirmation command for confirming the connection state of the CU to the communication unit 11 of the master CU.
  • the communication unit 11 of the master CU transmits a CU connection state confirmation packet carrying a CU connection state confirmation command from the third terminal to the slave CU (S1011).
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU resets the count value of the counter flag included in the packet transmitted to the slave CU. That is, the count value of the counter flag included in the packet transmitted from CU1A to CU1B is “0”.
  • the counter flag included in the packet transmitted from CU1A to CU1B is used to count the number of slave CUs connected to the master CU.
  • the control unit 16 of the slave CU that has received the CU connection status confirmation packet increments the count value of the counter flag (S1012).
  • the communication unit 11 of the slave CU transmits a CU connection state confirmation packet including the incremented counter flag to the master CU.
  • the communication unit 11 of the master CU receives the CU connection status confirmation packet from the slave CU via the third terminal (S1013).
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU stores information such as the count value of the counter flag included in the CU connection state confirmation packet received by the communication unit 11 of the master CU in the storage unit 13 of the master CU.
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU recognizes the connection state of the CU1 (S1014) as in the case of the recognition (S17) of the connection state of the DU2 described above. That is, for example, the control unit 16 of the master CU recognizes that one slave CU is connected in a daisy based on the count value of the counter flag.
  • control unit 16 of the master CU When recognizing the connection state of CU1, the control unit 16 of the master CU generates a relative ID of each CU1 (S1015).
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU stores the connection method of the CU 1, the number of connected units, and the relative ID in the unit connection information DB of the storage unit 13 of the master CU (S 1016).
  • the CU connection state confirmation process (S101) is periodically and repeatedly executed while the conference system S is in operation. That is, the CU connection status confirmation packet is periodically repeatedly transmitted and received between the master CU and the slave CU. Every time the control unit 16 of the master CU receives a connection status confirmation packet from the slave CU, the control unit 16 of the counter flag newly acquired (hereinafter referred to as “new CU count value”) is stored in the storage unit 13 of the master CU. The stored count value (hereinafter referred to as “old CU count value”) is compared. When the new CU count value matches the old CU count value, the control unit 16 of the master CU determines that there is no change in the connection state of CU1.
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU determines that there is a change in the connection state of CU1.
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU stores the new CU count value in the storage unit 13 of the master CU. That is, the control unit 16 of the master CU updates the old CU count value with the new CU count value.
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU updates the information stored in the unit connection information DB stored in the storage unit 13 in the connection state of the newly recognized slave CU. Therefore, when a connection abnormality occurs in the slave CU, the master CU immediately recognizes the occurrence of the connection abnormality and identifies the connection abnormality point. Also, when a change in the connection state of the slave CU occurs, the master CU updates the information stored in the unit connection information DB, thereby causing problems such as voice information synthesis processing before and after the change in the connection state. Does not occur.
  • the conference system S executes DU information acquisition process (S2) of the master DU.
  • the DU information acquisition process (S2) is the same as the DU information acquisition process (FIG. 17) described above.
  • the conference system S executes a slave CU information acquisition process (S102).
  • the slave CU information acquisition process is a process of acquiring CU unit information of the slave CU.
  • the CU unit information is, for example, a serial number (absolute ID) or a MAC address of CU1.
  • FIG. 33 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in the slave CU information acquisition process (S102).
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU transmits an information acquisition command for acquiring CU unit information of the slave CU to the communication unit 11 of the master CU.
  • the communication unit 11 of the master CU transmits an information acquisition packet carrying an information acquisition command to the slave CU (S1021).
  • the slave CU that has received the information acquisition command carries the CU unit information on the information acquisition packet in accordance with the information acquisition command and transmits it to the master CU (S1022).
  • the communication unit 11 of the master CU receives an information acquisition packet from the slave CU (S1023).
  • the communication unit 11 of the master CU transmits CU unit information to the control unit 16 of the master CU.
  • the control unit 16 acquires the absolute ID of the slave CU from the CU unit information (S1024).
  • the control unit 16 reads out the unit connection information DB, associates the absolute ID and the relative ID, and stores them in the unit connection information DB (S1025).
  • the slave DU initialization process (S103) is a process of initializing the unit setting of the slave DU connected to the slave CU and recognizing the connection state of the slave DU.
  • FIG. 34 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in the slave DU initialization process (S103).
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU transmits an initialization command for initializing the slave DU to the communication unit 11 of the master CU.
  • the communication unit 11 of the master CU transmits the initialization packet carrying the initialization command from the third terminal to the slave CU (S1031a).
  • the slave CU that has received the initialization packet transmits the initialization packet from both directions of the first terminal and the second terminal to the slave DU (S1031b).
  • the slave DU initializes the unit setting in accordance with the initialization command, and increments the count value of the counter flag (S1032).
  • the slave DU transmits an initialization packet in which the count value of the counter flag is incremented to the slave CU.
  • the initialization packet is transmitted between slave DUs in the same manner as the initialization process (FIG. 12).
  • the communication unit 11 of the slave CU receives the initialization packet from the slave DU via the first terminal and the second terminal (S1033b).
  • the control unit 16 of the slave CU stores information such as the count value of the counter flag included in the initialization packet received by the communication unit 11 of the slave CU in the storage unit 13 of the slave CU.
  • the control unit 16 of the slave CU recognizes the connection state of the slave DU (S1035b), and generates a relative ID of the slave DU (S1036b).
  • the relative ID is an ID that the slave CU uses to control the slave DU.
  • the control unit 16 of the slave CU associates the connection method of the slave DU, the number of connected devices, and the relative ID, and stores them in the unit connection information DB of the storage unit 13 of the slave CU (S1037b).
  • the communication unit 11 of the slave CU transmits the received initialization packet to the master CU (S1034b).
  • the communication unit 11 of the master CU receives the initialization packet from the slave CU via the third terminal (S1033a).
  • the communication unit 11 of the master CU transmits information such as the count value of the counter flag obtained from the received initialization packet to the control unit 16 of the master CU.
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU stores information such as the count value of the counter flag in the storage unit 13 of the master CU.
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU recognizes the connection state of the slave DU (S1035a), and generates a relative ID of the slave DU (S1036a). This relative ID is an ID that the master CU uses to control the slave DU.
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU associates the connection method of the slave DU, the number of connected devices, and the relative ID, and stores them in the unit connection information DB of the storage unit 13 of the master CU (S1037a).
  • the slave DU information acquisition process (S104) is a process of acquiring unit information of the slave DU connected to the slave CU.
  • FIG. 35 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in the slave DU information acquisition processing (S104).
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU transmits an information acquisition command for acquiring unit information of the slave DU to the communication unit 11 of the master CU.
  • the communication unit 11 of the master CU transmits an information acquisition packet carrying an information acquisition command to the slave CU via the third terminal (S1041a).
  • the slave CU that has received the information acquisition packet transmits the information acquisition packet to the slave DU from both directions of the first terminal and the second terminal (S1041b).
  • the slave DU puts unit information in the information acquisition packet in accordance with the information acquisition command and transmits the unit information to the slave CU (S1042).
  • the information acquisition packet is transmitted between slave DUs as in the DU information acquisition process (FIG. 17).
  • the communication unit 11 of the slave CU receives an information acquisition packet from the slave DU (S1043b).
  • the control unit 16 of the slave CU acquires the absolute ID of the slave DU from the unit information included in the information acquisition packet received by the communication unit 11 of the slave CU (S1045b).
  • the control unit 16 associates the absolute ID and the relative ID, and stores them in the unit connection information DB of the storage unit 13 of the slave CU (S1046b). That is, the control unit 16 of the slave CU can update the association between the relative ID and the absolute ID in the slave CU. Therefore, even if the connection state between the master CU and the slave CU is changed, the slave CU can operate in a stand-alone manner. As a result, before and after the change of the connection state of the slave CU, no problem of the information such as the synthesizing process of the voice information occurs.
  • the communication unit 11 of the slave CU transmits an information acquisition packet to the master CU (S1044b).
  • the communication unit 11 of the master CU receives the information acquisition packet from the slave CU via the third terminal (S1043a).
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU acquires an absolute ID from unit information included in the information acquisition packet received by the communication unit 11 of the master CU (S1045a).
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU associates the absolute ID and the relative ID and stores them in the unit connection information DB of the storage unit 13 of the master CU (S1046a).
  • FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of information stored in the storage unit 13 of the master CU after slave DU information acquisition processing.
  • the relative IDs "5" “6" “7” “8" of the four DU2 ring-connected to the terminal numbers "1" “2" of the slave CU (ID "2") are absolute IDs " E indicates that it is associated with “F", “G", and "H”.
  • the figure shows that the relative ID "1" of one CU 1 daisy-connected to the terminal number "3" is associated with the absolute ID " ⁇ ".
  • the conference system S executes DB information acquisition processing (S105) of the slave CU.
  • the DB information acquisition process (S105) of the slave CU is a process in which the master CU acquires unit setting information of the slave DU stored in the unit setting information DB held by the slave CU.
  • FIG. 37 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in the DB information acquisition processing (S105) of the slave CU.
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU transmits a DB information acquisition command for acquiring unit setting information of the slave CU to the communication unit 11 of the master CU.
  • the communication unit 11 of the master CU transmits a DB information acquisition packet carrying a DB information acquisition command to the slave CU via the third terminal (S1051).
  • the control unit 16 of the slave CU reads the unit setting information DB from the storage unit 13 of the slave CU, and transmits the unit setting information of the slave DU designated by the master CU to the communication unit 11 of the slave CU.
  • the communication unit 11 of the slave CU transmits a DB information acquisition packet carrying the unit setting information of the slave DU to the master CU (S1052).
  • the communication unit 11 of the master CU receives the DB information acquisition packet from the slave CU via the third terminal (S1053).
  • the communication unit 11 of the master CU transmits the unit setting information of the slave DU obtained from the received DB information acquisition packet to the control unit 16 of the master CU.
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU stores the unit setting information of the slave DU included in the DB information acquisition packet received by the communication unit 11 of the master CU in the unit setting information DB of the storage unit 13 of the master CU (S1054). By this processing, the master CU can specify the unit setting information of the slave DU held by the slave CU.
  • the conference system S executes a DU setting process (S3) of the master DU connected to the master CU.
  • the DU setting process (S3) is the same as the DU setting process (FIG. 20) described above.
  • the conference system S executes a slave DU setting process (S106).
  • the slave DU setting process (S106) is a process of setting a slave DU connected to the slave CU.
  • FIG. 38 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in the slave DU setting process (S106).
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU reads the unit setting information DB from the storage unit 13 of the master CU (S1061), and transmits a unit setting command for setting the slave DU to the communication unit 11 of the master CU.
  • the communication unit 11 of the master CU transmits a setting packet carrying a unit setting command to the slave CU (S1062a).
  • the slave CU that has received the setting packet transmits the setting packet to the slave DU (S1062b).
  • the slave DU that has received the setting packet changes the unit setting according to the unit setting command (S1063).
  • the communication unit 11 of the slave CU receives the setting packet from the slave DU which has executed the change of the unit setting (S1064b).
  • the communication unit 11 of the slave CU transmits the received setting packet to the master CU (S1065b).
  • the communication unit 11 of the master CU receives the setting packet from the slave CU (S1064a).
  • the conference system S executes a priority resetting process (S107).
  • S107 when there is a change in the connection state between the CU1 (when the new CU count value and the old CU count value do not match), the setting of the priority of each CU1, and the conference system S It is a process that automatically resolves the contradictory condition that occurs between the setting of the overall priority and the other.
  • the contradiction state is a state in which the number of priority-set DUs 2 is equal to or greater than the maximum allowable number of utterances.
  • the contradiction state when the maximum number of utterances of the entire conference system S is five, the number of DU2 to which the priority of the entire conference system S is set is seven.
  • This contradiction state may occur, for example, when CU1 in which priorities are set to four DU2s and CU1 in which priorities are set to three DU2s are connected.
  • FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the information processing of CU1 in the priority resetting process of CU1 included in the conference system S.
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU reads the unit setting information DB from the storage unit 13 of the master CU (S1071).
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU refers to the unit setting information DB to determine the number of DUs 2 to which the priority is set (hereinafter referred to as "the number of priority settings") and the maximum of the entire conference system S set to the master CU.
  • the speaker setting number is compared with (S1072).
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU When the priority setting number is equal to or more than the maximum speaker setting number (“YES” in S1072), the control unit 16 of the master CU is not currently connected among DU2 whose unit setting information is stored in the unit setting information DB.
  • the setting of the priority of DU (hereinafter referred to as "non-connected DU") 2 is turned off one by one (S1073).
  • the process of turning off the setting of the priority of the non-connected DU2 is executed sequentially from DU2 in which unit setting information is stored in the unit setting information DB of CU1 (CU1B in this embodiment) having a large numerical value of relative ID. That is, the processing of the slave DU connected to the slave CU (update of the priority) is prioritized over the processing of the master DU connected to the master CU (update of the priority).
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU compares the priority setting number with the maximum speaker setting number (S1074).
  • the priority setting number is equal to or more than the maximum speaker setting number (“YES” in S1074)
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU checks (specifies) the remaining number of non-connected DUs (S1075).
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU continues the process of turning off the setting of the priority of unconnected DU2 (S1073).
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU turns off the setting of the priority of the currently connected DU (hereinafter referred to as “connected DU”) 2 one by one. (S1076).
  • the process of turning off the setting of the priority of the connection DU2 is executed in order from the DU2 with the largest relative ID among the DU2 connected to the CU1 with the largest relative ID number.
  • control unit 16 of the master CU compares the priority setting number with the maximum speaker setting number (S1077).
  • the priority setting number is equal to or more than the maximum speaker setting number (“YES” in S1077)
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU continues the process of turning off the setting of the priority of the connection DU2 (S1076).
  • the control unit 16 of the master CU stores the unit setting information DB of the storage unit 13 of the master CU. Update the unit setting information.
  • the control unit 16 of the slave CU is stored in the unit setting information DB of the storage unit 13 of the slave CU in conjunction with the update of the unit setting information stored in the unit setting information DB of the storage unit 13 of the master CU. Update unit setting information.
  • the setting of the priority for each DU 2 stored in the storage unit 13 of each CU 1 is updated.
  • the conference system S ends the priority resetting process (S107).
  • the conference system S automatically changes the setting of the priority of DU2 when there is a change in the connection state of the CU1.
  • the conference system S updates the setting of the priority for each of the speech-enabled DUs 2. Therefore, in the conference system according to the present invention, the aforementioned contradiction does not occur.
  • the conference system S eliminates the need for setting of the priority according to the connection state of the CU 1 by the system administrator. Therefore, the burden of system administrator's priority resetting is reduced.
  • the priority resetting process when the number of connected slave CUs decreases in the CU connection state confirmation process, that is, the number of connected slave CUs (old CU count value) stored in the storage unit 13 of the master CU is newly added. It may be executed when the number of connected slave CUs (new CU count value) recognized by is larger (when it does not match). That is, for example, when the number of connected slave CUs decreases, the priority resetting process may be performed so that the number of DU2 to which the priority is set is the same before and after the change of the number of connected slaves. Specifically, in the priority resetting process, among the priority authorities of the master DUs stored in the storage unit 13 of the master CU, the priority authorities of some of the master DUs are prioritized (or priority setting is performed). It may be processed to turn on).
  • the priority resetting process when an increase in the number of connected slave CUs is confirmed in the CU connection state confirmation process, some masters among the priority authorities of the master DUs stored in the storage unit 13 of the master CU It may be processed to lower the priority of the priority of DU (or to turn off the setting of the priority). That is, when the number of connected slave CUs (old CU count value) stored in the storage unit 13 of the master CU is smaller than the newly recognized number of connected slave CUs (new CU count value) (when they do not match) The priority reset process is performed to lower the priority of priority of some master DUs (or to turn off the setting of the priority), instead of lowering the priority of the priority from the slave DU described above. May be
  • the operation processing (S4) is the same as the above-described operation processing (FIG. 22) except that the master CU manages the connection state of the slave CU and slave DU, the audio information of the slave DU, and the like. That is, the master CU repeatedly transmits and receives operation packets with the master DU, and repeatedly transmits and receives operation packets with the slave DU via the slave CU. At this time, the slave CU repeatedly transmits and receives an operation packet to and from the slave DU.
  • the conference system S has a conference mode.
  • a conference mode among various setting items that define the operation of the conference system S, a combination of setting contents of setting items “override” “microphone on trigger (priority setting)” and “microphone on trigger (priority not set)” is specified. It is information (union information).
  • the conference system S specifies a combination of setting contents of override, microphone on trigger (priority setting), and microphone on trigger (priority not set) based on the conference mode.
  • Each of the setting items will be described later.
  • FIG. 40 is a schematic view showing an example of the conference mode.
  • the figure shows that the conference system S has three conference modes "free talk mode”, “request talk mode”, and “full remote mode”.
  • the figure shows the combination of the setting contents of override for each conference mode, microphone on trigger (priority setting), and microphone on trigger (priority not set).
  • any of “off”, “on / FIFO” and “off / LIFO” can be selected as the setting content of the setting item "override”.
  • either “manual trigger” or “automatic trigger” can be selected as the setting content of the setting item “mike on trigger (priority setting)”.
  • “manual trigger” or “automatic trigger” can be selected as the setting content of the setting item “mike on trigger (priority setting)”.
  • “full remote mode” the same figure indicates that the setting item "microphone on trigger (priority not set)" can not be set.
  • Each setting content for each setting item shown in the figure will be described later.
  • the conference system S stores in advance the information indicating the combination of the information specifying the conference mode shown in FIG. 40 and the setting content of each setting item in the storage unit 13 of CU 1 before the conference mode is selected. .
  • the conference system S refers to the storage unit 13 based on the information identifying the conference mode input from the operation terminal 4 by the system administrator or the like, that is, “override” corresponding to the conference mode. Identify each setting of “Mike on trigger (priority setting)” and “Mike on trigger (priority not set)”. That is, the storage unit 13 associates and stores combination information and information specifying the setting content of each setting item.
  • the override is a setting item related to an assignment method for determining “on” / “off” of the override in the assignment of the voice slot and the voice area to the DU 2 to which the request flag is assigned.
  • Overriding is the end of the utterance of DU2 to which the voice slot and the voice area have already been assigned when there is a speech request without any space in the voice slot and the voice area (a request flag is given to the operation packet). Without waiting for a voice request and a voice area to be assigned to DU 2 for which there is a speech request.
  • Overriding includes the assignment scheme when "on” and the assignment scheme when "off”. When the override is "on", the override performs processing according to one of FIFO (First In First Out) and LIFO (Last In First Out) allocation schemes.
  • the FIFO is an assignment scheme in which the assignment of the voice slot of DU 2 to which speech is permitted first and the voice domain is canceled among DU 2 to which the voice slot and voice domain have already been assigned.
  • DU2 to which a voice slot and a voice area are assigned is deallocated between the voice slot and the voice area.
  • LIFO is an allocation scheme in which, of DU 2 to which a voice slot and a voice area have already been assigned, the voice slot and voice area of DU 2 to which speech is permitted last are unassigned.
  • the voice slots and the voice area only the DU2 to which the last free voice slot and the voice area are assigned (the speech is permitted at the immediately preceding timing) is switched.
  • the assignment method when the override is "off” is an assignment method in which the assignment of the voice slot and voice region of DU2 for which the speech has ended is canceled out of DU2 to which the voice slot and voice region are already assigned. . That is, after the end of the utterance of DU2 (a) to which an audio slot and an audio area have already been allocated to DU2 that has made an utterance request, the audio allocated to DU2 (a) for which the utterance has ended is awaited. Slots and voice areas are assigned. That is, the request process (FIG. 28) described above is a process executed when the override is “off”.
  • allocation method information specifying any one of the plurality of allocation methods is associated with the union information and stored in the storage unit 13.
  • the conference mode "free talk mode” is associated with the assignment method corresponding to the setting contents "off", "on / FIFO", and "on / LIFO” of the setting item "override”.
  • the assignment scheme information is information included in the control information described above. That is, for example, when the setting content “on / FIFO” is selected in the setting item “override”, the conference system S performs the speech request according to the allocation method in which the allocation of the audio slot and the audio area is canceled in a courtesy manner. A voice slot and a voice area are assigned to DU2 that was located.
  • the microphone on trigger is a mode related to setting of a trigger for giving a request flag (speech request) to an operation packet, that is, a method for giving a request flag.
  • the microphone on trigger is a setting item "mike on trigger (priority setting)" for a priority set DU (hereinafter referred to as “priority set DU”) 2p and a DU not set priority (hereinafter referred to as “priority non-set DU” And 2) the setting item “mike on trigger (priority not set)” for 2 n.
  • the microphone on trigger is a trigger for turning on the microphone 3 attached to the DU 2 and includes the two application methods of the “manual trigger” and the “automatic trigger” described above. In the microphone on trigger, either the “manual trigger” or the “automatic trigger” is selected.
  • application system information specifying any one of the plurality of application systems is associated with the association information and stored in the storage unit 13.
  • the conference mode “request talk mode” is associated with the assignment method corresponding to the setting content “manual trigger” of the setting item “microphone on trigger (priority setting)”.
  • the assignment scheme information is information included in the control information described above.
  • the assignment scheme information is stored in the storage unit 13 in association with the assignment scheme information.
  • the free talk mode is a conference mode in which the user of DU 2 to which a voice slot is assigned can freely speak.
  • a voice slot and a voice area are always assigned to the priority setting DU 2 p.
  • a voice slot and a voice area are assigned to the priority non-setting DU 2 n in accordance with the selected assignment scheme.
  • the operating terminal 4 is not necessarily required in the free talk mode.
  • the setting item “override” in the free talk mode is selected from one of three setting contents of “off”, “on / FIFO”, and “on / LIFO”.
  • the setting item “mic on trigger” in the free talk mode is individually set for each DU 2. That is, for example, DU2 in which the manual trigger is selected and DU2 in which the automatic trigger is selected may be mixed.
  • the request talk mode is a conference mode in which an utterance request of the priority non-setting DU 2 n is manually triggered. A voice slot and a voice area are always assigned to the priority setting DU 2 p. Based on the request from the operation terminal 4, the priority non-setting DU 2 n is selected to permit or reject the speech request.
  • the setting content "off” can not be selected. That is, in the request talk mode, one of “on / FIFO” and “on / LIFO” is selected as the setting content of the override.
  • the full remote mode is a conference mode in which the operation of the operation terminal 4 enables speech of the priority non-setting DU 2 n.
  • a voice slot and a voice area are always assigned.
  • the utterance is permitted based on the request from the operation terminal 4.
  • the setting content "off” can not be selected. That is, in the full remote mode, one of “on / FIFO” and “on / LIFO” is selected as the setting content of the override.
  • the trigger can not be set for the priority non-setting DU 2 n.
  • the conference system S operates based on the assignment method of the voice slot and the voice area of each DU 2 and the assignment method of the request flag, which are determined according to the conference mode selected from the plurality of conference modes.
  • FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing information processing of conference mode selection (S200).
  • the selection of the conference mode (S200) is, for example, between the DU information acquisition process (FIGS. 17 and 18) and the DU setting process (FIGS. 20 and 21) in the information processing performed by the conference system S described above. To be executed.
  • the operation terminal 4 reads the combination information from the storage unit 13 of the CU 1 (master CU) connected to the operation terminal 4 by the operation of the system administrator or the like, and stores the combination information in the storage unit 43 (S2001).
  • the conference mode is selected (S2002). That is, for example, the operation terminal 4 allows the system administrator or the like to make a meeting from the free talk mode (S201), the request talk mode (S202), and the full remote mode (S203) via a preparation screen to be described later. Let one of the conference modes be selected based on etc.
  • the control unit 46 of the operation terminal 4 specifies combination information according to the selected conference mode from among the plurality of combination information stored in the storage unit 43 (S2003).
  • the control unit 46 of the operation terminal 4 sets “off” to the system administrator or the like as the setting content of the setting item “override” of each DU2.
  • “On / FIFO” “On / LIFO” is displayed on the display unit 44 to be selected.
  • the control unit 46 of the operation terminal 4 sets “manual trigger” to a system administrator or the like as setting contents of setting items “mike on trigger (priority setting)” and “mike on trigger (priority not set)” of each DU 2
  • the display unit 44 displays a screen for selecting one of “automatic trigger”. By operating the screen displayed on the display unit 44, the assignment method between the voice slot and the voice area for each DU 2 and the assignment method of the request flag are determined.
  • the communication unit 41 of the operation terminal 4 transmits the determined assignment method of the voice slot and the voice area for each DU 2 and the assignment method of the request flag as the identified combination information to the CU 1 (S 2004).
  • CU1 stores the combination information received from operation terminal 4 in storage unit 13 as unit setting information for each DU 2 (with regard to DU 2 in which unit setting information is already stored, unit setting information stored in storage unit 13) Is updated).
  • CU1 executes the above-mentioned DU setting process (FIG. 20, 21) based on the updated unit setting information, and changes the unit setting for each DU2.
  • the conference system S operates based on the selected conference mode.
  • Conference Mode “Free Talk Mode” As described above, DU 2 makes a speech request based on the individually set microphone on trigger.
  • FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the information processing of CU1 in the free talk mode.
  • the control unit 16 of CU1 waits for a speech request from DU2 ("No" in S2011).
  • a speech request is issued from DU2 ("YES” in S2011)
  • the control unit 16 of CU1 checks whether DU2 which has made the speech request is the priority setting DU2p or the priority non-setting DU2n (S2012).
  • the control unit 16 of the CU1 assigns a predetermined sound slot and a sound area to the priority setting DU2p (S2013).
  • the control unit 16 of the CU 1 assigns a vacant voice slot and a voice area to the priority non-setting DU 2 n (S2015).
  • control unit 16 of the CU 1 confirms the setting content of the override of the priority non-setting DU 2 n (S 2016).
  • the control unit 16 of the CU 1 sets the voice slot and the voice area to the priority non-setting DU 2 n according to the setting content of either FIFO or LIFO. Forced assignment (override) (S2017).
  • the control unit 16 of the CU 1 checks again the space between the audio slot and the audio area (S2014). At this time, the priority non-setting DU 2 n is in the speech wait state (request wait state) until the voice slot and the voice area become free.
  • the microphone on trigger of priority non-setting DU 2 n is set in advance to the manual mode.
  • the microphone on trigger of the priority setting DU 2 p is previously set to either the automatic mode or the manual mode.
  • FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing information processing of CU1 in the request talk mode.
  • the control unit 16 of CU1 waits for a speech request from DU2 (“NO” in S2021).
  • a speech request is issued from DU2 ("Yes" in S2021)
  • the control unit 16 of CU1 checks whether DU2 which has made the speech request is the priority setting DU2p or the priority non-setting DU2n (S2022).
  • control part 16 of CU1 lists priority unset DU2n in a speech request list (S2024).
  • the speech request list is, for example, a table in which DUs 2 which have made speech requests are arranged in the order of request.
  • the priority unset DU 2 n listed in the speech request list is in a request waiting state until either speech request permission or rejection is selected.
  • the permission and the rejection of the speech request are selected by the operation of the operation terminal 4 such as the chairperson, for example.
  • the control unit 16 of CU 1 sets the priority unset DU 2 n to an audio slot and an audio area according to the setting contents of either FIFO or LIFO. Forced allocation (S2026). At this time, the control unit 16 of the CU 1 deletes the priority non-setting DU 2 n for which the speech request is permitted from the speech request list (S 2027).
  • the control unit 16 of the CU 1 deletes the priority non-setting DU 2 n from the speech request list (S 2028).
  • FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing information processing of CU1 in the full remote mode.
  • the control unit 16 of CU1 waits for one of an utterance request from DU2 and a request from the operation terminal 4 (“NO” in S2031).
  • the control unit 16 of the CU 1 confirms whether the request is an utterance request from DU 2 or a request from the operation terminal 4 (S2032).
  • the speech request is made only by the priority setting DU 2 p.
  • the request from the operation terminal 4 is made to the priority non-setting DU 2 n.
  • the control unit 16 of the CU 1 assigns a predetermined voice slot and a voice area to the priority setting DU 2 p that has made the speech request (S 2033).
  • the control unit 16 of the CU 1 confirms the free space between the audio slot and the audio area (S2034).
  • the control unit 16 of the CU 1 allocates a vacated voice slot and voice area to the priority non-setting DU 2 n whose speech is requested by the operation terminal 4 (S2035) ).
  • the control unit 16 of the CU1 sets the voice slot and the voice area in the priority non-setting DU2n according to the setting content of either FIFO or LIFO. And are forcibly allocated (S2036).
  • the conference system S has a plurality of selectable conference modes in which the settings of the microphone on trigger mode and the override mode are combined. Therefore, for example, a person who is an employee of the general affairs department and who prepares for operation setting of the conference system S immediately before the start of a conference can be easily selected by appropriately selecting the optimal conference mode from a plurality of conference modes.
  • the operation setting of the conference system S can be prepared.
  • ⁇ Input screen of operation terminal ⁇ Various control information for controlling the operation of the conference system S is input, for example, via an input screen displayed on the display unit 44 of the operation terminal 4 and stored in the storage unit 13 of the CU 1.
  • the input screen is a screen used by a system administrator or the like at the time of input / change of control information. That is, for example, the input screen is a screen for inputting settings of CU1 and DU2.
  • the control information includes, for example, information on system settings of the conference system S, information on priority, a speech request list, and the like.
  • the control unit 46 of the operation terminal 4 reads control information corresponding to the input screen from the storage unit 13 of the CU 1 and causes the display unit 44 to display the control information.
  • the input screen is, for example, a conference system initial setting screen (hereinafter referred to as "initial screen”), a conference preparation screen (hereinafter referred to as “preparation screen”), and a conference progress screen (hereinafter referred to as "progress screen”).
  • the control unit 46 of the operation terminal 4 selects one input screen based on a predetermined condition described later. That is, for example, the control unit 46 determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, and based on the result of the determination, the input screen displayed on the display unit 44 includes an initial screen, a preparation screen, and a progress screen.
  • the predetermined conditions include, for example, the state of physical and communication connection between CU1 and DU2 (such as presence or absence of connection), completion of setting of a specific item, occurrence of abnormality of connection state of DU2, specific DU ( For example, the connection state of the interpretation unit etc. That is, for example, the control unit 46 determines whether or not specific control information among the plurality of control information is stored in the storage unit 13 of the CU 1, and whether or not DU2 is connected to the unit connection unit 12 b Result of the determination as to whether or not a specific DU2 of the plurality of DUs 2 is connected to the unit connection section 12b, or a connection abnormality of the DU 2 connected to the unit connection section 12b occurs.
  • the input screen displayed on the display unit 44 is selected on the basis of the result of the determination as to whether or not it is present.
  • FIG. 45 is a schematic view showing a selection screen of an input screen displayed on the display unit 44 of the operation terminal 4 included in the conference system S.
  • the figure shows items that can be selected by solid lines and items that can not be selected by dashed lines.
  • a selection screen is displayed on the display unit 44 of the operation terminal 4.
  • the selection screen is, for example, a screen for selecting one of the initial screen, the preparation screen, and the progress screen, such as a system administrator or a person who prepares the operation setting of the conference system S. .
  • the input screen that is displayed selectably on the selection screen changes, for example, according to the communication state between CU1 and DU2. That is, for example, when CU1 and DU2 can not communicate, only the initial screen can be selected among the input screens displayed on the selection screen.
  • the fact that CU1 and DU2 can not communicate means, for example, a state in which DU2 is not connected to CU1.
  • the preparation screen and the progress screen can be selected among the input screens displayed on the selection screen.
  • Communication between CU1 and DU2 means, for example, a state in which DU2 is connected to CU1.
  • the input screen displayed in a selectable manner on the selection screen is determined by the control unit 46 of the operation terminal 4.
  • the selectable input screen changes according to the predetermined condition, thereby facilitating the selection of the input screen by the person who inputs the information and performing various settings based on the predetermined condition. Therefore, erroneous operations or erroneous inputs, such as contradiction in the contents to be set, are reduced.
  • the selectable input screen may change according to authentication information or the like input to the login screen.
  • the selection screen may display, for example, a screen to which information on the setting of the priority is input when the CU 1 and the plurality of DUs 2 can communicate.
  • the selection screen may display a screen on which communication information is input on the initial screen, for example, when the CU 1 and the plurality of DUs 2 can not communicate.
  • the selection screen may be, for example, a mode for displaying a screen on which information on settings corresponding to a specific application is input when a DU corresponding to the specific application such as an interpretation unit is connected to the CU 1.
  • the input screen that can be selected on the selection screen is not limited to the present embodiment. That is, for example, the input screen selectable on the selection screen may include another input screen such as a maintenance screen.
  • FIG. 46 is a schematic view of the initial screen.
  • the initial screen is, for example, a screen on which the system administrator inputs / changes the setting of the conference system S.
  • the information displayed on the initial screen is information related to the system settings of the conference system S, for example, communication information such as a subnet mask used by CU1 to identify DU2 (for communication between CU1 and DU2), and firmware It is information for initial setting of the conference system S, such as information, terminal setting information of CU1, and the like.
  • the CU1 and the DU2 can communicate.
  • the preparation screen and the progress screen can be selected on the selection screen.
  • FIG. 47 is a schematic view of the preparation screen.
  • the preparation screen is, for example, a screen on which a person who prepares for operation setting of the conference system S inputs the setting of each DU 2.
  • the information displayed on the preparation screen is unit setting information of each DU 2, for example, information on setting of priority, information on setting of microphone on trigger, and notification information such as light emission color of the light emitting unit 28 of DU 2. These pieces of information are displayed, for example, in the preparation screen in association with the relative ID of DU2.
  • the unit setting information displayed on the preparation screen for example, the unit setting information of DU 2 connected to CU 1 in the past is information stored in the unit setting information DB.
  • the unit setting information of DU2 newly connected to CU1 is the setting (initial value) at the time of shipping of DU2 as described above.
  • FIG. 48 is a schematic view of a preparation screen after information input. The drawing shows underlining the information newly input from the preparation screen shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 49 is a schematic view of the progress screen.
  • the progress screen is, for example, a screen on which a person who performs a meeting such as a chairperson inputs information for controlling the operation of each DU 2.
  • the information displayed on the progress screen is information on control of each DU 2, for example, information on an utterance request list or a conference mode.
  • the progress screen is used, for example, as a chairperson when the request talk mode of the conference mode described above or the full remote mode is selected.
  • the operation terminal 4 displays the speech request list on the progress screen, and causes the chairperson to select permission and rejection for the speech request in the progress screen.
  • the control unit 46 of the operation terminal 4 selects an input screen of 1 based on a predetermined condition. Therefore, the conference system S avoids contradiction between the input setting contents. That is, the conference system according to the present embodiment realizes reliable setting work with a simple configuration.
  • Each input screen in the present invention may have a different display mode of GUI (Graphic User Interface) according to the items displayed on the screen. That is, for example, the conference system S may display the initial screen in an accordion format, the preparation screen in a wizard format, and the progress screen in a tab format.
  • GUI Graphic User Interface
  • items displayed on the display unit 44 may be different according to the authority of the person operating the operation terminal 4. As a result, the input or change of information different from the authority of the person operating the operation terminal 4 is prevented.
  • the conference system S periodically transmits a packet including a counter flag from CU1 to DU2 and stores information stored in a database in which a relative ID is associated with an absolute ID. Update.
  • the conference system S even if the connection abnormality occurs in DU2 and the relative ID is changed, the association between the relative ID and the absolute ID is updated, and thus information such as voice information before and after the change in the connection state of DU2 There is no problem with That is, the conference system according to the present invention reliably manages the connection state of the CU and the DU 2 and can continuously acquire information from the DU when a connection abnormality occurs.
  • the conference system S automatically changes the setting of the priority when there is a connection or disconnection between the CUs 1. Therefore, in the conference system according to the present invention, the aforementioned contradiction does not occur. Further, the conference system according to the present invention eliminates the need for the system administrator to set the priority according to the connection state of the CUs. Therefore, the conference system according to the present invention alleviates the burden of system administrator's priority re-setting.
  • the conference system S takes in the speech request from DU 2 by the processing of the periodic request flag, and causes the CU 1 to transmit a command according to the availability of the voice slot and the voice area. . That is, the conference system S does not transmit a command from DU2 to CU1 each time a speech request is made. Therefore, the conference system according to the present invention does not receive an excessive load of information processing even if there are speech requests from a plurality of DUs at one time. As a result, the conferencing system S according to the present invention does not require high processing power as compared to a system in which the DU receives a command from the CU each time it makes a speech request.
  • DU 2 which has made a speech request automatically enters a request waiting state when there is no space between the voice slot and the voice area. Therefore, the conference system according to the present invention does not need to respond to all the speech requests on software, and the load of information processing on software is reduced.
  • the control unit 46 of the operation terminal 4 selects an input screen of 1 based on a predetermined condition. Therefore, the conference system according to the present invention can avoid the contradiction between the contents set by the person who inputs the information. That is, the conference system according to the present invention realizes reliable setting work with a simple configuration.
  • the conference system S selects the conference mode in which the override and the microphone on trigger are associated with each other, thereby allocating the voice slot of each DU 2 and the voice area, or Set the request flag assignment method. Therefore, for example, even if it is not a person who needs expert knowledge such as an operator, the conference system S can be easily selected by appropriately selecting an optimal conference mode from among a plurality of conference modes from the content of the conference and the configuration of participants. It is possible to prepare for operation setting. That is, the conference system according to the present invention is excellent in the convenience of setting work.
  • Control unit (CU1), With the discussion unit (DU2), Operation terminal (operation terminal 4), Have The discussion unit sends audio information to the control unit;
  • the operation terminal is connected to each of the control unit and the discussion unit via a communication line.
  • the control unit Storage unit (storage unit 13), Equipped with The operation terminal is A display unit (display unit 44), A control unit (control unit 46), Equipped with The storage unit stores a plurality of control information for controlling the operation of the control unit and the discussion unit,
  • the display unit displays an input screen of one of a plurality of input screens to which any one of the plurality of control information is input,
  • the control unit selects the input screen displayed on the display unit from among the plurality of input screens based on a predetermined condition.
  • a conference system characterized by
  • (Feature 2) The control unit determines whether or not specific control information is stored in the storage unit among the plurality of control information, and the input screen displayed on the display unit is determined based on the result of the determination. select, The conference system according to Feature 1.
  • Feature 3 The control unit Connection unit (unit connection unit 12b), Equipped with The discussion unit is connected to the connection unit.
  • the conference system according to Feature 1.
  • the control unit determines whether the discussion unit is connected to the connection unit, and selects the input screen displayed on the display unit based on a result of the determination.
  • the conference system according to Feature 3.
  • a plurality of the discussion units are connected to the connection unit, The control unit determines whether or not a specific discussion unit of the plurality of discussion units is connected to the connection unit, and the input screen displayed on the display unit based on the result of the determination. To choose The conference system according to Feature 3.
  • the control unit determines whether or not a connection abnormality of the discussion unit connected to the connection unit has occurred, and selects the input screen displayed on the display unit based on the result of the determination. Do, The conference system according to Feature 3.
  • the plurality of control information is Communication information used by the control unit to identify the discussion unit, Including The control unit causes the display unit to display the input screen to which the communication information is input when the discussion unit is not connected to the connection unit.
  • the conference system according to Feature 3.
  • the plurality of control information is Priority right information indicating priority order of transmission of the voice information from the discussion unit to the control unit, Including
  • the control unit causes the display unit to display the input screen to which the priority authority information is input when a plurality of discussion units are connected to the connection unit.
  • the conference system according to any one of Features 3 to 7.
  • the plurality of input screens are An initial screen on which setting information of the control unit is input; A preparation screen on which setting information of the discussion unit is input; A progress screen on which control information for controlling the operation of the discussion unit is input; including, The conference system according to Feature 1.

Abstract

Provided is a meeting system with which setting tasks can be achieved reliably with a simple configuration. This meeting system (S) comprises: a control unit (1); a discussion unit (2); and an operation terminal (4) connected to the control unit and the discussion unit via a communication line. The control unit includes a storage section (13). The operation terminal includes a display section (44) and a control section (46). The storage section stores a plurality of pieces of control information controlling the operation of the meeting system. The display section displays an input screen among a plurality of input screens through which one of the plurality of pieces of control information is input, and the control section selects the input screen to be displayed on the display section from among the plurality of input screens on the basis of a predetermined condition.

Description

会議システムConference system
 本発明は、会議システムに関する。 The present invention relates to a conference system.
 会議システムは、例えば、議会など、多人数の参加者が出席する会議などに用いられる。会議システムは、1つのコントロールユニットと、コントロールユニットに通信回線(有線や無線)を介して接続される複数のディスカッションユニットと、ディスカッションユニットに取り付けられるマイクロホンと、コントロールユニットに接続される操作端末と、で構成される。 The conference system is used, for example, for a conference where a large number of participants attend, such as a parliament. The conference system includes one control unit, a plurality of discussion units connected to the control unit via a communication line (wired or wireless), a microphone attached to the discussion unit, an operation terminal connected to the control unit, It consists of
 コントロールユニットは、ディスカッションユニットごとの動作を管理すると共に、会議システム全体の動作を制御する。ディスカッションユニットは、ディスカッションユニットの使用者の音声をマイクロホンにより収音して音声情報を生成し、音声情報をコントロールユニットに送信する。 The control unit manages the operation of each discussion unit and controls the operation of the entire conference system. The discussion unit picks up the voice of the user of the discussion unit with a microphone to generate voice information, and transmits the voice information to the control unit.
 操作端末は、議長などの会議の進行役が会議の進行に用いたり、会議システムの管理者がコントロールユニットやディスカッションユニットの設定などに用いる端末である。会議の進行に用いられる情報の入力やコントロールユニットなどの設定に用いられる情報は、操作端末の表示部に表示される入力画面に入力される(例えば、非特許文献1参照)。 The operation terminal is a terminal used by a facilitator of a meeting such as a chairperson to advance a meeting, or used by an administrator of the meeting system to set a control unit and a discussion unit. Information used for input of information used for proceeding of the conference and information used for setting of the control unit and the like is input to an input screen displayed on the display unit of the operation terminal (for example, see Non-Patent Document 1).
 会議システムに設定される項目は、会議システムの導入初期段階で設定される項目や、会議ごとに会議の開催直前に設定される項目や、会議の進行中に設定される項目など、多岐にわたる。会議システムは、各項目に設定された内容に基づいて動作する。したがって、各項目に設定された内容同士は整合しなければならない。すなわち、項目によっては、すでに設定された項目の内容に応じて、後に設定される項目の内容が決定または制限されなければならない。 The items set in the conference system are diverse, such as items set in the initial stage of introduction of the conference system, items set immediately before the meeting is held for each meeting, and items set in the middle of the meeting. The conference system operates based on the content set for each item. Therefore, the contents set in each item must be consistent with each other. That is, depending on the item, the content of the item to be set later has to be determined or restricted depending on the content of the item already set.
 しかし、各項目の設定者や設定時期は、異なる場合があり得る。そのため、先に設定されているべき項目が設定されていないまま、別の項目が設定されてしまった場合など、各項目に設定される内容同士に矛盾が生じることがあった。そのため、会議システムが誤動作してしまうことがあり得る。 However, the setting person and setting time of each item may be different. Therefore, when another item is set while the item to be set first is not set, contradiction may occur in the contents set in each item. Therefore, the conference system may malfunction.
 本発明は、以上のような従来技術の問題点を解消するためになされたもので、簡易な構成で確実な設定作業を実現することができる会議システムを提供することを目的とする。 The present invention has been made to solve the problems of the prior art as described above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a conference system capable of realizing reliable setting work with a simple configuration.
 本発明は、会議システムであって、コントロールユニットと、ディスカッションユニットと、操作端末と、を有してなり、ディスカッションユニットは、コントロールユニットに対して音声情報を送信し、操作端末は、コントロールユニットとディスカッションユニットのそれぞれと通信回線を介して接続され、コントロールユニットは、記憶部、を備え、操作端末は、表示部と、制御部と、を備え、記憶部は、コントロールユニットとディスカッションユニットとの動作を制御する複数の制御情報を記憶し、表示部は、複数の制御情報のいずれかが入力される複数の入力画面のうちの1の入力画面を表示し、制御部は、所定の条件に基づいて、複数の入力画面の中から表示部に表示される入力画面を選択する、ことを特徴とする。 The present invention is a conference system, comprising a control unit, a discussion unit, and an operation terminal, wherein the discussion unit transmits audio information to the control unit, and the operation terminal comprises the control unit and the control unit. The control unit is connected to each of the discussion units via a communication line, the control unit includes a storage unit, the operation terminal includes a display unit and a control unit, and the storage unit is an operation of the control unit and the discussion unit Stores a plurality of control information for controlling the display, the display unit displays an input screen of one of the plurality of input screens to which any of the plurality of control information is input, and the control unit is based on a predetermined condition The input screen displayed on the display unit is selected from the plurality of input screens.
 本発明によれば、簡易な構成で確実な設定作業を実現することができる会議システムを提供できる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a conference system capable of realizing reliable setting work with a simple configuration.
本発明にかかる会議システムの実施の形態を示すネットワーク構成図である。FIG. 1 is a network configuration diagram showing an embodiment of a conference system according to the present invention. 図1の会議システムが備えるコントロールユニットのハードウェア構成を示す機能ブロック図である。It is a functional block diagram which shows the hardware constitutions of the control unit with which the meeting system of FIG. 1 is provided. 図2のコントロールユニットが送受信するパケットのデータ構造図である。It is a data structure figure of the packet which the control unit of FIG. 2 transmits / receives. 図2のコントロールユニットの記憶部に記憶される情報の例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of the information memorize | stored in the memory | storage part of the control unit of FIG. 図2のコントロールユニットの記憶部に記憶される別の情報を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the other information memorize | stored in the memory | storage part of the control unit of FIG. 図1の会議システムが備えるディスカッションユニットの斜視図である。It is a perspective view of the discussion unit with which the meeting system of FIG. 1 is provided. 図6のディスカッションユニットのハードウェア構成を示す機能ブロック図である。It is a functional block diagram which shows the hardware constitutions of the discussion unit of FIG. 図6のディスカッションユニットの背面図である。It is a rear view of the discussion unit of FIG. マイクロホンが取り付けられた図6のディスカッションユニットの斜視図である。FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the discussion unit of FIG. 6 with a microphone attached. 図1の会議システムが備える操作端末のハードウェア構成を示す機能ブロック図である。It is a functional block diagram which shows the hardware constitutions of the operating terminal with which the meeting system of FIG. 1 is provided. 1つのコントロールユニットを備える本発明にかかる会議システムの情報処理を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the information processing of the conference system concerning this invention provided with one control unit. 図11の情報処理の初期化処理におけるコントロールユニットの情報処理を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the information processing of the control unit in the initialization process of the information processing of FIG. 図12の初期化処理における会議システムの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the information processing of the conference system in the initialization process of FIG. 図12の初期化処理における会議システムの情報処理を示す別のシーケンス図である。It is another sequence diagram which shows the information processing of the meeting system in the initialization process of FIG. 図12の初期化処理における会議システムの情報処理を示すさらに別のシーケンス図である。FIG. 13 is yet another sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system in the initialization processing of FIG. 12; 図12の初期化処理後のコントロールユニットの記憶部に記憶される情報の例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of the information memorize | stored in the memory | storage part of the control unit after the initialization process of FIG. 図11の情報処理のDU情報取得処理におけるコントロールユニットの情報処理を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the information processing of the control unit in DU information acquisition processing of the information processing of FIG. 図17のDU情報取得処理における会議システムの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the information processing of the conference system in DU information acquisition process of FIG. 図17のDU情報取得処理後のコントロールユニットの記憶部に記憶される情報の例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of the information memorize | stored in the memory | storage part of the control unit after DU information acquisition process of FIG. 図11の情報処理のDU設定処理におけるコントロールユニットの情報処理を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the information processing of the control unit in DU setting processing of the information processing of FIG. 図20のDU設定処理における会議システムの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the information processing of the conference system in DU setting process of FIG. 図11の情報処理の運用処理におけるコントロールユニットの情報処理を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the information processing of the control unit in the operation processing of the information processing of FIG. 図22の運用処理における会議システムの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the information processing of the meeting system in the operation processing of FIG. 図22の運用処理において、ディスカッションユニットの接続状態に変更が有るときの会議システムの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。FIG. 23 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system when there is a change in the connection state of the discussion unit in the operation processing of FIG. 22; 図22の運用処理の変更処理におけるコントロールユニットの情報処理を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the information processing of the control unit in the change process of the operation process of FIG. 図25の変更処理における初期化処理の一例としての会議システムの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the information processing of the conference system as an example of the initialization process in the change process of FIG. 図25の変更処理後のコントロールユニットの記憶部に記憶されている情報の例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of the information memorize | stored in the memory | storage part of the control unit after the change process of FIG. 図22の運用処理のリクエスト処理におけるコントロールユニットの情報処理を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the information processing of the control unit in the request processing of the operation processing of FIG. 図28のリクエスト処理における会議システムの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the information processing of the meeting system in the request processing of FIG. 図22の運用処理のリクエスト処理におけるコントロールユニットの別の情報処理を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows another information processing of the control unit in the request processing of the operation processing of FIG. 複数のコントロールユニットを備える本発明にかかる会議システムの情報処理を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the information processing of the conference system concerning this invention provided with several control units. 図31の情報処理のCU接続状態確認処理における会議システムの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the information processing of the conference system in CU connection state confirmation processing of information processing of FIG. 図31の情報処理のスレーブCU情報取得処理における会議システムの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the information processing of the conference system in the slave CU information acquisition process of the information processing of FIG. 図31の情報処理のスレーブDU初期化処理における会議システムの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the information processing of the conference system in the slave DU initialization process of the information processing of FIG. 図31の情報処理のスレーブDU情報取得処理における会議システムの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the information processing of the conference system in the slave DU information acquisition process of the information processing of FIG. 図35のスレーブDU情報取得処理後のコントロールユニットの記憶部に記憶される情報の例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of the information memorize | stored in the memory | storage part of the control unit after the slave DU information acquisition process of FIG. 図31の情報処理のスレーブCUのDB情報取得処理における会議システムの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the information processing of the conference system in DB information acquisition processing of the slave CU of the information processing of FIG. 図31の情報処理のスレーブDU設定処理における会議システムの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the information processing of the conference system in the slave DU setting process of the information processing of FIG. 図31の会議システムが備えるコントロールユニットのプライオリティ再設定処理におけるコントロールユニットの情報処理を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the information processing of the control unit in the priority reset process of the control unit with which the conference system of FIG. 31 is provided. 図1の会議システムが備える会議モードの例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of the meeting mode with which the meeting system of FIG. 1 is provided. 図40の会議システムの会議モードの選択の情報処理を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the information processing of selection of the meeting mode of the meeting system of FIG. 図41の会議モードのフリートークモードにおけるコントロールユニットの情報処理を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the information processing of the control unit in the free talk mode of the meeting mode of FIG. 図41の会議モードのリクエストトークモードにおけるコントロールユニットの情報処理を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the information processing of the control unit in request | requirement talk mode of the meeting mode of FIG. 図41の会議モードのフルリモートモードにおけるコントロールユニットの情報処理を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the information processing of the control unit in full remote mode of the meeting mode of FIG. 図1の会議システムが備える操作端末の表示部に表示される入力画面の選択画面を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the selection screen of the input screen displayed on the display part of the operating terminal with which the meeting system of FIG. 1 is provided. 図45の入力画面の例である初期画面の模式図である。It is a schematic diagram of the initial screen which is an example of the input screen of FIG. 図45の入力画面の別の例である準備画面の模式図である。It is a schematic diagram of the preparation screen which is another example of the input screen of FIG. 図47の準備画面において、情報入力後の準備画面の模式図である。In the preparation screen of FIG. 47, it is a schematic diagram of the preparation screen after information input. 図45の入力画面のさらに別の例である進行画面の模式図である。It is a schematic diagram of the advancing screen which is another example of the input screen of FIG.
●会議システム(1)●
 以下、図面を参照しながら、本発明にかかる会議システムの実施の形態について説明する。
● Conference system (1) ●
Hereinafter, embodiments of a conference system according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
●会議システムの構成
 図1は、本発明にかかる会議システムの実施の形態を示すネットワーク構成図である。
 会議システムSは、例えば、議会など、多人数の参加者が出席する会議などで用いられる。会議システムSは、会議の進行を円滑にすると共に、会議の議事録の作成などを行う。会議システムSは、コントロールユニット(以下「CU」という。)1A-1Cと、ディスカッションユニット(以下「DU」という。)2A1-2A4、2B1-2B4、2C1-2C4と、マイクロホン3A1-3A4、3B1-3B4、3C1-3C4と、操作端末4と、を有してなる。
Configuration of Conference System FIG. 1 is a network configuration diagram showing an embodiment of a conference system according to the present invention.
The conference system S is used, for example, in a conference where a large number of participants attend, such as a parliament. The conference system S facilitates the progress of the conference, and creates the minutes of the conference. The conference system S includes a control unit (hereinafter referred to as "CU") 1A-1C, a discussion unit (hereinafter referred to as "DU") 2A1-2A4, 2B1-2B4, 2C1-2C4 and microphones 3A1-3A4, 3B1-. 3B4 and 3C1-3C4 and the operation terminal 4 are provided.
 CU1A-1Cの構成は、全て同じである。DU2A1-2A4、2B1-2B4、2C1-2C4の構成は、全て同じである。マイクロホン3A1-3A4、3B1-3B4、3C1-3C4の構成は、全て同じである。 The configurations of CU1A-1C are all the same. The configurations of DU2A1-2A4, 2B1-2B4, and 2C1-2C4 are all the same. The configurations of the microphones 3A1-3A4, 3B1-3B4, 3C1-3C4 are all the same.
 以下の説明において、CU1A-1Cのそれぞれを区別する必要がないとき、それぞれを「CU1」と総称する。DU2A1-2A4、2B1-2B4、2C1-2C4のそれぞれを区別する必要がないとき、それぞれを「DU2」と総称する。マイクロホン3A1-3A4、3B1-3B4、3C1-3C4のそれぞれを区別する必要がないとき、それぞれを「マイクロホン3」と総称する。 In the following description, when it is not necessary to distinguish each of CU1A-1C, each is collectively referred to as “CU1”. When it is not necessary to distinguish each of DU2A1-2A4, 2B1-2B4, and 2C1-2C4, each is collectively referred to as "DU2". When it is not necessary to distinguish each of the microphones 3A1-3A4, 3B1-3B4 and 3C1-3C4, they are collectively referred to as a "microphone 3".
 なお、会議システムSを構成するCU1の数とDU2の数とは、本実施の形態に限定されない。すなわち、例えば、各CU1に接続されるDU2の数は、異なってもよい。 Note that the number of CU1 and the number of DU2 that configure the conference system S are not limited to the present embodiment. That is, for example, the number of DU2 connected to each CU1 may be different.
●DUのCUへの接続方式
 次に、複数のDU2のCU1への接続方式について、説明する。
 複数のDU2は、リング接続方式(以下「リング接続」という。)と、デイジーチェーン接続方式(以下「デイジー接続」という。)と、のいずれかの接続方式によりCU1に接続される。
Connection Method of DU to CU Next, a connection method of a plurality of DUs 2 to the CU 1 will be described.
The plurality of DUs 2 are connected to the CU 1 by any one of a ring connection method (hereinafter referred to as “ring connection”) and a daisy chain connection method (hereinafter referred to as “daisy connection”).
 リング接続とは、複数のDU2がCU1と円環状に連なって接続される接続方式である。例えば、DU2A1-2A4は、CU1Aにリング接続により接続される。DU2がCU1にリング接続により接続される場合、後述するCU1のユニット接続部の端子は、2つ使用される。 The ring connection is a connection method in which a plurality of DUs 2 are connected in series in a ring shape with the CU 1. For example, DU2A1-2A4 is connected to CU1A by ring connection. When DU2 is connected to CU1 by ring connection, two terminals of the unit connection part of CU1 described later are used.
 デイジー接続とは、複数のDU2がCU1と数珠つなぎ状に連なって接続される接続方式である。例えば、DU2C1-2C4は、CU1Cにデイジー接続により接続される。DU2がCU1にデイジー接続により接続される場合、後述するCU1のユニット接続部の端子は、1つ使用される。 The daisy connection is a connection method in which a plurality of DUs 2 are connected in series with the CU 1 in a beaded connection. For example, DU2C1-2C4 is daisy-connected to CU1C. When DU2 is connected to CU1 by daisy connection, one terminal of a unit connection unit of CU1 described later is used.
 なお、CU1とDU2との接続の態様は、本実施の形態に限定されない。すなわち、例えば、複数のDU2は、1つのCU1にリング接続とデイジー接続との2つの接続方式を混在して接続されてもよい。つまり、あるDU2はCU1にリング接続され、他のDU2はその同じCU1にデイジー接続されてもよい。 Note that the mode of connection between CU1 and DU2 is not limited to this embodiment. That is, for example, a plurality of DUs 2 may be connected to one CU 1 in a mixed manner of two connection methods of ring connection and daisy connection. That is, one DU 2 may be ring connected to CU 1 and the other DU 2 may be daisy connected to the same CU 1.
●CUとCUとの接続
 次に、CU1同士の接続について、説明する。
 3つのCU1は、デイジー接続により接続される。例えば、CU1BとCU1Cとは、CU1Aにデイジー接続で接続される。この場合、例えば、CU1Aは、マスター(Master)に設定され、CU1BとCU1Cとは、スレーブ(Slave)に設定される。マスターとスレーブとについては、後述する。
Connection of CUs and CUs Next, connection between CUs 1 will be described.
The three CU1 are connected by daisy connection. For example, CU1B and CU1C are daisy-connected to CU1A. In this case, for example, CU1A is set to a master (Master), and CU1B and CU1C are set to a slave (Slave). The master and the slave will be described later.
 各CU1への電源の供給は、個別にACアダプタなどを介して行われる。すなわち、CU1間での電源の供給は、行われない。そのため、各CU1は、会議システムSにおいて、電源の制約を受けることなく相互に物理的に離れた箇所に設置可能である。 Supply of power to each CU 1 is individually performed via an AC adapter or the like. That is, the supply of power between CU1 is not performed. Therefore, in the conference system S, the respective CUs 1 can be installed at physically separated locations without being restricted by the power supply.
●CUの構成
 図2は、CU1のハードウェア構成を示す機能ブロック図である。
 CU1は、DU2の動作を制御すると共に、会議システムS全体の動作を制御する。CU1は、通信部11と、接続部12と、記憶部13と、表示部14と、操作部15と、制御部16と、を有してなる。
Configuration of CU FIG. 2 is a functional block diagram showing a hardware configuration of CU1.
The CU 1 controls the operation of the DU 2 and also controls the operation of the entire conference system S. The CU 1 includes a communication unit 11, a connection unit 12, a storage unit 13, a display unit 14, an operation unit 15, and a control unit 16.
 通信部11は、接続部12を介して、他のCU1、DU2、操作端末4、外部機器5などとの間の通信を実現する。通信部11は、例えば、IEEE(Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers)802.3に準拠した通信を行う。 The communication unit 11 realizes communication with the other CU 1, DU 2, the operation terminal 4, the external device 5, and the like through the connection unit 12. The communication unit 11 performs communication in compliance with, for example, IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) 802.3.
 CU1とDU2との間や、マスターとなるCU1とスレーブとなるCU1との間などの通信は、パケットの送受信にて実行される。パケットは、ヘッダ部とデータ部とを含む。 Communication between CU1 and DU2 or between CU1 as a master and CU1 as a slave is performed by transmitting and receiving packets. The packet includes a header part and a data part.
 図3は、パケットのデータ構造図である。
 ヘッダ部は、通信に用いられるアドレスと、後述するカウンタフラグと、を含む。データ部は、制御コマンドと、音声情報や後述するユニット情報などと、後述するリクエストフラグと、を格納する領域を含む。制御コマンドは、CU1がDU2に指示を与えるコマンドや、マスターとなるCU1がスレーブとなるCU1に指示を与えるコマンドなどである。データ部は、CU1からDU2への指示がないとき、または、マスターとなるCU1からスレーブとなるCU1への指示がないときには、制御コマンドを含まない。音声情報は、マイクロホン3からの音声信号に基づいて、DU2により生成される情報である。音声情報は、DU2からCU1に送信されるパケットのデータ部に格納される。
FIG. 3 is a data structure diagram of a packet.
The header portion includes an address used for communication and a counter flag described later. The data part includes an area for storing a control command, voice information, unit information to be described later, and a request flag to be described later. The control command is, for example, a command by which CU1 instructs DU2 or a command by which CU1 as a master instructs as a slave. The data part does not include a control command when there is no instruction from CU1 to DU2 or when there is no instruction from CU1 as a master to CU1 as a slave. The audio information is information generated by DU 2 based on the audio signal from the microphone 3. The voice information is stored in the data portion of the packet transmitted from DU2 to CU1.
 データ部は、音声情報が格納される複数の領域(以下「音声領域」という。)を含む。音声領域は、会議システムSが備える複数のDU2の中で同時に発話可能なDU2の数を規定する枠である。データ部に含まれる音声領域の数は、後述する最大話者設定数と同数である。CU1は、音声領域ごとに、個別の番号(例えば、1,2,3,・・・)を割り当てる。音声領域の詳細については、後述する。 The data unit includes a plurality of areas (hereinafter referred to as "voice areas") in which voice information is stored. The voice area is a frame that defines the number of DUs 2 that can be simultaneously uttered among the plurality of DUs 2 included in the conference system S. The number of speech areas included in the data section is the same as the maximum number of set talkers described later. CU1 assigns an individual number (eg, 1, 2, 3,...) To each voice area. Details of the sound area will be described later.
 図2に戻る。
 接続部12は、他のCU1、DU2、操作端末4、外部機器5などを接続するインターフェイスである。接続部12は、外部機器接続部12aとユニット接続部12bとを備える。
Return to FIG.
The connection unit 12 is an interface for connecting the other CU1 and DU2, the operation terminal 4, the external device 5, and the like. The connection unit 12 includes an external device connection unit 12 a and a unit connection unit 12 b.
 外部機器接続部12aは、例えば、操作端末4、外部機器5、通信機器などを接続するインターフェイスである。外部機器接続部12aは、例えば、USB(Universal Serial Bus)端子、ネットワーク端子、アナログ入出力端子などである。外部機器5は、例えば、USBメモリ、マイクロホン、スピーカ、翻訳システムなどである。通信機器は、ハブ、ルータ、無線LAN(Local Area Network)アクセスポイントなどである。 The external device connection unit 12a is, for example, an interface for connecting the operation terminal 4, the external device 5, a communication device, and the like. The external device connection unit 12a is, for example, a USB (Universal Serial Bus) terminal, a network terminal, an analog input / output terminal, or the like. The external device 5 is, for example, a USB memory, a microphone, a speaker, a translation system, or the like. The communication device is a hub, a router, a wireless local area network (LAN) access point, or the like.
 ユニット接続部12bは、他のCU1やDU2に接続されるインターフェイスである。ユニット接続部12bは、例えば、第1端子と、第2端子と、第3端子と、第4端子と、を備える。第1端子と第2端子とは、例えば、DU2にのみ接続可能な接続端子である。第3端子と第4端子とは、例えば、他のCU1とDU2のいずれにも接続可能な接続端子である。 The unit connection unit 12 b is an interface connected to another CU 1 or DU 2. The unit connection portion 12 b includes, for example, a first terminal, a second terminal, a third terminal, and a fourth terminal. The first terminal and the second terminal are, for example, connection terminals that can be connected only to DU2. The third terminal and the fourth terminal are, for example, connection terminals that can be connected to any of the other CU1 and DU2.
 なお、ユニット接続部12bの端子の構成は、本実施の形態に限定されない。すなわち、例えば、端子の数は「6」でもよい。 The configuration of the terminals of the unit connection portion 12b is not limited to this embodiment. That is, for example, the number of terminals may be "6".
 記憶部13は、CU1やDU2が、後述する情報処理を実現するために必要な情報を記憶する。記憶部13は、各種の情報やプログラムなどを一時記憶する(格納する)、RAM(Read Access Memory)、ROM(Read Only Memory)、ハードディスクなどで構成される。 The storage unit 13 stores information necessary for the CU 1 and DU 2 to realize information processing to be described later. The storage unit 13 temporarily stores (stores) various types of information and programs, and is configured by a RAM (Read Access Memory), a ROM (Read Only Memory), a hard disk, and the like.
 記憶部13に記憶される情報は、例えば、CU1とDU2との動作など、会議システムSの動作を制御する制御情報などである。制御情報は、例えば、ユニット設定情報やユニット接続情報、後述する会議システムSのシステム設定に関する情報や発話要求リストなど、を含む。 The information stored in the storage unit 13 is, for example, control information that controls the operation of the conference system S, such as the operation of CU1 and DU2. The control information includes, for example, unit setting information, unit connection information, information on system setting of the conference system S described later, a speech request list, and the like.
 ユニット設定情報は、例えば、過去にCU1に接続されたDU2の設定に関する情報である。ユニット設定情報は、例えば、パラメータ情報とモード情報とを含む。ユニット設定情報は、ユニット設定情報データベース(以下「ユニット設定情報DB」という。)に記憶される。 The unit setting information is, for example, information on the setting of DU 2 connected to CU 1 in the past. The unit setting information includes, for example, parameter information and mode information. The unit setting information is stored in a unit setting information database (hereinafter referred to as "unit setting information DB").
 図4は、ユニット設定情報DBに記憶される情報の例を示す模式図である。
 ユニット設定情報DBは、例えば、DU2のシリアルナンバーから構成される絶対IDと、DU2のユニット設定情報と、が関連付けられて記憶されるデータベースである。DU2のユニット設定情報は、例えば、システム管理者によりCU1を介してユニット設定情報DBに記憶される。このとき、DU2のユニット設定情報は、DU2の絶対IDに関連付けられてユニット設定情報DBに記憶される。
FIG. 4 is a schematic view showing an example of information stored in the unit setting information DB.
The unit setting information DB is, for example, a database in which an absolute ID composed of a serial number of DU2 and unit setting information of DU2 are associated with each other and stored. The unit setting information of DU2 is stored, for example, in the unit setting information DB by the system administrator via CU1. At this time, the unit setting information of DU2 is stored in the unit setting information DB in association with the absolute ID of DU2.
 図4は、例えば、絶対ID「A」と、ユニット設定情報「X1」とが、関連付けられてユニット設定情報DBに記憶されていることを示す。 FIG. 4 shows that, for example, the absolute ID "A" and the unit setting information "X1" are associated with each other and stored in the unit setting information DB.
 パラメータ情報は、例えば、DU2に取り付けられたマイクロホン3の設定情報(例えば、イコライザ設定や音量設定など)と、後述する発光部28の発光状態に関する情報と、後述するプライオリティの設定情報と、を含む。 The parameter information includes, for example, setting information (for example, equalizer setting, volume setting, and the like) of the microphone 3 attached to DU2, information on the light emission state of the light emitting unit 28 described later, and setting information on priority described later. .
 モード情報は、各DU2の動作状態に関する情報である。動作状態に関する情報は、例えば、後述する会議モードや、後述するマイクオントリガーなど、を含む。 The mode information is information on the operating state of each DU 2. The information regarding the operation state includes, for example, a conference mode described later, a microphone on trigger described later, and the like.
 ユニット接続情報は、CU1に接続されているDU2の接続に関する情報である。ユニット接続情報は、CU1に接続されたDU2の接続方式と、接続台数と、に関する情報である。ユニット接続情報は、ユニット接続情報データベース(以下「ユニット接続情報DB」という。)に記憶される。 The unit connection information is information on the connection of DU 2 connected to CU 1. The unit connection information is information on the connection method of the DU 2 connected to the CU 1 and the number of connected devices. The unit connection information is stored in a unit connection information database (hereinafter referred to as "unit connection information DB").
 図5は、ユニット接続情報DBに記憶される情報を示す模式図である。
 ユニット接続情報DBは、CU1に接続されたDU2の接続に関する情報が記憶されるデータベースである。ユニット接続情報DBは、CU1の起動のたびに作成される。「端子番号」は、ユニット接続部12bの端子の番号である。「接続方式」は、ユニット接続部12bの4つの端子へのDU2の接続方式を示す。「台数」は、各端子に接続されているDU2の数である。「相対ID」は、各DU2に相対的に割り当てられるID(例えば、1から始まる連続する番号など)である。「絶対ID」は、各DU2に絶対的に割り当てられるIDである。
FIG. 5 is a schematic view showing information stored in the unit connection information DB.
The unit connection information DB is a database in which information on connection of DU 2 connected to CU 1 is stored. The unit connection information DB is created each time CU1 is activated. The "terminal number" is the number of the terminal of the unit connection portion 12b. The “connection method” indicates a connection method of DU 2 to the four terminals of the unit connection portion 12 b. “Number” is the number of DU2 connected to each terminal. The “relative ID” is an ID (for example, a consecutive number starting from 1) assigned relatively to each DU 2. The “absolute ID” is an ID absolutely assigned to each DU 2.
 図5は、例えば、端子番号「1」と、接続方式「リング」と、台数「4」と、相対ID「1」・・・「4」と、絶対ID「A」・・・「D」と、が関連付けられてユニット接続情報DBに記憶されていることを示す。同図は、相対ID「1」「2」「3」「4」が、絶対ID「A」「B」「C」「D」と関連付けられてユニット接続情報DBに記憶されていることを示す。 In FIG. 5, for example, the terminal number "1", the connection method "ring", the number "4", the relative ID "1" ... "4", the absolute ID "A" ... "D" And are associated with each other and stored in the unit connection information DB. The figure shows that relative IDs "1" "2" "3" "4" are stored in unit connection information DB in association with absolute IDs "A" "B" "C" "D". .
 図2に戻る。
 表示部14は、例えば、会議システムS全体の音量、録音状況、プリセットパターン、アラーム情報などを表示する。表示部14は、例えば、LCD(Liquid Crystal Display)や有機EL(Organic Electroluminescence)などに代表されるディスプレイである。
Return to FIG.
The display unit 14 displays, for example, the volume of the entire conference system S, the recording status, the preset pattern, the alarm information, and the like. The display unit 14 is a display represented by, for example, a liquid crystal display (LCD) or an organic electroluminescence (EL).
 操作部15は、表示部14に表示される表示内容の変更などを行う。操作部15は、例えば、ダイヤルやボタンなどで構成される。 The operation unit 15 changes the display content displayed on the display unit 14 or the like. The operation unit 15 is configured by, for example, a dial or a button.
 制御部16は、CU1の動作の制御、CU1に接続されたDU2の動作の制御、情報の演算や加工などを行う。制御部16は、通信部11と、記憶部13と、表示部14と、操作部15と、の動作の制御を行う。制御部16は、例えば、CPU(Central Processing Unit)などのマイクロプロセッサと、その周辺回路と、から構成される。 The control unit 16 controls the operation of the CU 1, controls the operation of the DU 2 connected to the CU 1, and calculates and processes information. The control unit 16 controls operations of the communication unit 11, the storage unit 13, the display unit 14, and the operation unit 15. The control unit 16 is configured of, for example, a microprocessor such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) and a peripheral circuit thereof.
 例えば、CU1BとCU1CとがCU1Aに図1に示すように接続される場合、CU1Aをマスターとすると、CU1Aの制御部16は、CU1B、CU1Cの動作の制御、DU2B1-2B4、DU2C1-2C4の動作の制御も行う。すなわち、マスターとなるCU1の制御部16は、スレーブとなるCU1の動作の制御と、スレーブとなるCU1に接続されるDU2の動作の制御も行う。 For example, when CU1B and CU1C are connected to CU1A as shown in FIG. 1, assuming that CU1A is the master, the control unit 16 of CU1A controls CU1B and CU1C operations, and DU2B1-2B4 and DU2C1-2C4 operations It also controls the That is, the control unit 16 of the CU1 serving as the master also controls the operation of the CU1 serving as the slave and also controls the operation of the DU2 connected to the CU1 serving as the slave.
●DUの構成
 図6は、DU2の斜視図である。
 図7は、DU2のハードウェア構成を示す機能ブロック図である。
 図8は、DU2の背面図である。
Structure of DU FIG. 6 is a perspective view of DU2.
FIG. 7 is a functional block diagram showing a hardware configuration of DU2.
FIG. 8 is a rear view of DU2.
 DU2は、マイクロホン3から入力された音声信号に基づいて音声情報を生成して、音声情報をCU1に送信すると共に、CU1から後述する合成音声情報(他のDU2がCU1に送信した音声情報)を受信して、音波を出力する。DU2は、例えば、会議の参加者ごとに割り当てられる。DU2は、通信回線を介して、CU1と、他のDU2と、に接続される。DU2は、筐体20と、通信部21と、接続部22と、記憶部23と、表示部24と、操作部25と、制御部26と、スピーカ27と、発光部28と、を有してなる。 The DU 2 generates voice information based on the voice signal input from the microphone 3 and transmits the voice information to the CU 1 and transmits from the CU 1 synthetic voice information (voice information transmitted by another DU 2 to the CU 1) described later. Receive and output sound waves. The DU 2 is assigned, for example, to each participant of the conference. DU2 is connected to CU1 and other DU2 via a communication line. The DU 2 includes a housing 20, a communication unit 21, a connection unit 22, a storage unit 23, a display unit 24, an operation unit 25, a control unit 26, a speaker 27, and a light emitting unit 28. Become.
 筐体20は、通信部21と、記憶部23と、制御部26と、スピーカ27とを収納する。筐体20は、少なくとも第1面20aと、第2面20bと、を備える。 The housing 20 accommodates the communication unit 21, the storage unit 23, the control unit 26, and the speaker 27. The housing 20 includes at least a first surface 20a and a second surface 20b.
 第1面20aは、筐体20の正面側に配置される。第1面20aは、DU2の使用時に、DU2の使用者(以下「使用者」という。)から視認可能な位置に配置される。第1面20aは、複数の放出孔20ahを備える。 The first surface 20 a is disposed on the front side of the housing 20. The first surface 20 a is disposed at a position where it can be viewed by the user of DU 2 (hereinafter referred to as “user”) when DU 2 is used. The first surface 20a includes a plurality of discharge holes 20ah.
 放出孔20ahは、スピーカ27からの音波をDU2の外部に放出する。放出孔20ahは、第1面20aに配置される。 The emission hole 20ah emits the sound wave from the speaker 27 to the outside of DU2. The discharge holes 20ah are disposed on the first surface 20a.
 第2面20bは、筐体20の背面側に配置される。第2面20bは、DU2の使用時に、他のDU2の使用者など(以下「第三者」という。)から視認可能な位置(DU2の背面など)に配置される。 The second surface 20 b is disposed on the back side of the housing 20. The second surface 20b is disposed at a position (such as the rear surface of DU2) that is visible to other users of DU2 and the like (hereinafter referred to as "third party") when using DU2.
 通信部21は、CU1との通信を実現する。通信部21は、例えば、IEEE802.3に準拠した通信を行う。通信部21が送受信する情報は、例えば、マイクロホン3からの音声信号に基づいて生成した音声情報、ユニット設定情報、他のDU2からの音声情報などである。 The communication unit 21 realizes communication with the CU 1. The communication unit 21 performs, for example, communication conforming to IEEE 802.3. The information transmitted and received by the communication unit 21 is, for example, audio information generated based on an audio signal from the microphone 3, unit setting information, audio information from another DU 2 or the like.
 接続部22は、CU1や他のDU2やマイクロホン3などに接続される。接続部22は、ソケット部22aとユニット接続部22bとを備える。ソケット部22aは、マイクロホン3が接続されるソケットである。ソケット部22aは、例えば、JEITA RC-5236「音響機器用ラッチロック式丸型コネクタ」に規定される3ピンプラグ用のソケットである。ソケット部22aは、第1面20aに配置される。 The connection unit 22 is connected to the CU 1, the other DU 2, the microphone 3, and the like. The connection portion 22 includes a socket portion 22a and a unit connection portion 22b. The socket 22a is a socket to which the microphone 3 is connected. The socket portion 22a is, for example, a socket for a 3-pin plug defined in JEITA RC-5236 "Ratch lock type round connector for audio equipment". The socket portion 22a is disposed on the first surface 20a.
 ユニット接続部22bは、CU1や他のDU2に接続されるインターフェイスである。ユニット接続部22bは、2つの端子を備える。デイジー接続の末端となるDU2を除き、2つの端子は、いずれもCU1や他のDU2に接続される。2つの端子間の情報の送受信は、通信部21により制御される。 The unit connection unit 22 b is an interface connected to the CU 1 or another DU 2. The unit connection part 22b is provided with two terminals. Both terminals are connected to CU1 and other DU2 except DU2 which is the end of the daisy connection. The communication unit 21 controls transmission and reception of information between the two terminals.
 記憶部23は、DU2が後述する情報処理を実現するために必要な情報を記憶する。記憶部23は、例えば、RAMやROMなどで構成される。記憶部23は、通信部21が受信したユニット設定情報などを記憶する。記憶部23に記憶されるユニット設定情報は、例えば、DU2のパラメータ情報や後述する発光部28の発光状態を決定する情報などである。 The storage unit 23 stores information necessary for the DU 2 to realize information processing described later. The storage unit 23 includes, for example, a RAM, a ROM, and the like. The storage unit 23 stores unit setting information and the like received by the communication unit 21. The unit setting information stored in the storage unit 23 is, for example, parameter information of DU 2 or information for determining the light emission state of the light emitting unit 28 described later.
 表示部24は、例えば、DU2に接続されるヘッドホン(不図示)などの音量や副音声(例えば、通訳者の音声など)のチャンネルを表示する。表示部24は、例えば、LCD、有機ELなどに代表されるディスプレイである。表示部24は、筐体20の第1面20aに配置される。 The display unit 24 displays, for example, the volume of a headphone (not shown) or the like connected to the DU 2 or a channel of a sub audio (for example, the audio of an interpreter). The display unit 24 is a display represented by, for example, an LCD, an organic EL, or the like. The display unit 24 is disposed on the first surface 20 a of the housing 20.
 操作部25は、使用者の操作に応じた検出信号を制御部26へ出力する。操作部25は、操作ボタン25aと、音量調節ボタン25bと、チャンネル変更ボタン25cと、を備える。操作部25は、筐体20の第1面20aに配置される。 The operation unit 25 outputs a detection signal corresponding to the user's operation to the control unit 26. The operation unit 25 includes an operation button 25a, a volume control button 25b, and a channel change button 25c. The operation unit 25 is disposed on the first surface 20 a of the housing 20.
 操作ボタン25aは、例えば、後述する発話要求を使用者が行う際に、使用者に押下される。音量調節ボタン25bは、使用者がDU2に接続されるヘッドホンなどの音量を調節する際に、使用者に操作される。チャンネル変更ボタン25cは、例えば、副音声(通訳など)のチャンネルを変更する際に、使用者に操作される。 The operation button 25a is pressed by the user, for example, when the user makes a speech request to be described later. The volume control button 25 b is operated by the user when the user adjusts the volume of headphones and the like connected to DU 2. The channel change button 25c is operated by the user, for example, when changing the channel of the sub audio (such as an interpreter).
 制御部26は、マイクロホン3からの音声信号の処理、DU2の動作の制御、音声情報の生成などを行う。制御部26は、通信部21と、記憶部23と、表示部24と、操作部25と、スピーカ27と、発光部28と、の動作の制御を行う。制御部26は、例えば、CPUなどのマイクロプロセッサと、その周辺回路と、から構成される。 The control unit 26 processes the audio signal from the microphone 3, controls the operation of DU2, generates audio information, and the like. The control unit 26 controls operations of the communication unit 21, the storage unit 23, the display unit 24, the operation unit 25, the speaker 27, and the light emitting unit 28. The control unit 26 includes, for example, a microprocessor such as a CPU and its peripheral circuits.
 スピーカ27は、通信部21からの音声信号を音波に変換して、音波を出力する。スピーカ27からの音波は、第1面20aの放出孔20ahからDU2の外部に放出される。 The speaker 27 converts an audio signal from the communication unit 21 into a sound wave, and outputs the sound wave. The sound wave from the speaker 27 is emitted from the emission hole 20ah of the first surface 20a to the outside of DU2.
 発光部28は、光を用いてステータス情報を報知するため、制御部26からの信号に基づいて発光する。発光部28は、例えば、マルチカラーLED(Light-emitting diode)である。すなわち、発光部28は、複数の色で発光可能である。発光部28は、第1発光部28aと第2発光部28bとを備える。 The light emitting unit 28 emits light based on a signal from the control unit 26 to notify status information using light. The light emitting unit 28 is, for example, a multi-color LED (Light-emitting diode). That is, the light emitting unit 28 can emit light in a plurality of colors. The light emitting unit 28 includes a first light emitting unit 28 a and a second light emitting unit 28 b.
 ステータス情報は、例えば、マイクロホン3のオン・オフなどのマイクロホン3の動作状態を示す情報、後述する発話要求を実行中か否かを示す情報などのDU2の動作状態を示す情報、後述するグループ情報などである。発話要求は、使用者の発話を可能とするために、マイクロホン3をオンにすることを要求することである。発話要求は、DU2からCU1に対して行われる。 The status information is, for example, information indicating the operating state of the microphone 3 such as on / off of the microphone 3, information indicating the operating state of the DU 2 such as information indicating whether a speech request described later is being executed, group information described later Etc. The speech request is to request that the microphone 3 be turned on to enable the user's speech. A speech request is made from DU2 to CU1.
 第1発光部28aは、使用者にステータス情報を報知する。第1発光部28aは、操作ボタン25aに配置される。 The first light emitting unit 28a notifies the user of the status information. The first light emitting unit 28a is disposed on the operation button 25a.
 第2発光部28bは、第三者にステータス情報を報知する。第2発光部28bは、筐体20の第2面20bに配置される。すなわち、第2発光部28bは、第三者から視認可能である。 The second light emitting unit 28 b notifies the third party of the status information. The second light emitting unit 28 b is disposed on the second surface 20 b of the housing 20. That is, the second light emitting unit 28 b can be viewed from a third party.
 発光部28の発光状態は、ユニット設定情報に基づいて、制御部26により制御される。発光部28の発光状態は、発光パターンと発光色とを含む。発光部28の発光状態は、ユニット設定情報として記憶部23に記憶される。発光パターンは、消灯パターンと、点灯パターンと、点滅パターンと、ディマー(減光)点灯パターンと、を含む。 The light emission state of the light emitting unit 28 is controlled by the control unit 26 based on the unit setting information. The light emission state of the light emitting unit 28 includes a light emission pattern and a light emission color. The light emission state of the light emitting unit 28 is stored in the storage unit 23 as unit setting information. The light emission pattern includes a light off pattern, a lighting pattern, a blinking pattern, and a dimmer (light reduction) lighting pattern.
 発光色は、例えば、あらかじめシステム管理者などに設定された10色の中から選択される。発光色の相違により、発光部28は、例えば、グループ情報を表示できる。グループ情報は、例えば、会議などの参加者の所属(国、政党など)、参加者の言語、後述するプライオリティの段階などを基にグループ分けした内容を示す情報である。そのため、例えば、システム管理者は、第2発光部28bの発光色をに基づいて、設定の変更などを容易に実行可能である。 The luminescent color is selected from, for example, 10 colors set in advance by a system administrator or the like. The light emitting unit 28 can display, for example, group information according to the difference in emission color. The group information is, for example, information indicating contents divided into groups based on the affiliation (country, political party, etc.) of participants such as a conference, the language of the participants, the stage of priority described later, and the like. Therefore, for example, the system administrator can easily change the setting based on the light emission color of the second light emitting unit 28b.
 DU2への電源は、各DU2が接続されるCU1から通信回線ケーブルを介して供給される。 Power to DU 2 is supplied from CU 1 to which each DU 2 is connected via a communication line cable.
●マイクロホンの構成
 図9は、マイクロホン3が取り付けられたDU2の斜視図である。
 マイクロホン3は、使用者の音声(音波)を収音する。すなわち、マイクロホン3は、音波を電気信号に変換する。マイクロホン3は、例えば、グースネック型のコンデンサマイクロホンである。マイクロホン3の指向性は、例えば、単一指向性である。マイクロホン3は、DU2のソケット部22aに取り付けられる。マイクロホン3の電源は、DU2から、例えば、ファントム電源により供給される。マイクロホン3は、「オン」の状態では音声を収音して音声信号を出力し、「オフ」の状態では音声を収音しない。
Configuration of Microphone FIG. 9 is a perspective view of DU 2 to which the microphone 3 is attached.
The microphone 3 picks up the user's voice (sound wave). That is, the microphone 3 converts sound waves into electrical signals. The microphone 3 is, for example, a gooseneck condenser microphone. The directivity of the microphone 3 is, for example, unidirectional. The microphone 3 is attached to the socket 22a of DU2. The power supply of the microphone 3 is supplied from DU 2 by, for example, a phantom power supply. The microphone 3 picks up the voice in the "on" state and outputs a voice signal, and does not pick up the voice in the "off" state.
 なお、マイクロホン3は、例えば、単色のLEDリングを備えてもよい。この場合、LEDリングの電源は、DU2のソケット部22aを介してDU2から供給される。 The microphone 3 may include, for example, a single color LED ring. In this case, the power of the LED ring is supplied from DU2 through the socket 22a of DU2.
●操作端末の構成
 図10は、操作端末4のハードウェア構成を示す機能ブロック図である。
 操作端末4は、会議システムSの運用、CU1の設定、DU2の設定、CU1とDU2とのリモートコントロールなどを行う端末である。CU1の設定とDU2との設定は、例えば、システム管理者や会議の議長などが操作端末4を操作して行われる。
Configuration of Operation Terminal FIG. 10 is a functional block diagram showing a hardware configuration of the operation terminal 4.
The operation terminal 4 is a terminal that performs operation of the conference system S, setting of CU1, setting of DU2, remote control of CU1 and DU2, and the like. The setting of CU 1 and the setting of DU 2 are performed, for example, by operating the operation terminal 4 by a system administrator or a chairperson of a conference.
 操作端末4は、例えば、PC(Personal Computer)、タブレット端末、スマートフォンなどの汎用の情報処理装置である。操作端末4は、通信回線を介してCU1と接続され、CU1と通信回線とを介してDU2と接続される。操作端末4は、通信部41と、記憶部43と、表示部44と、操作部45と、制御部46と、を有してなる。 The operation terminal 4 is, for example, a general-purpose information processing apparatus such as a PC (Personal Computer), a tablet terminal, and a smartphone. The operation terminal 4 is connected to the CU 1 through the communication line, and is connected to the DU 2 through the CU 1 and the communication line. The operation terminal 4 includes a communication unit 41, a storage unit 43, a display unit 44, an operation unit 45, and a control unit 46.
 通信部41は、CU1との間の通信を実現する。通信部41は、LAN、WAN(Wide Area Network)などの通信ネットワークを介してCU1と接続されるインターフェイスである。 The communication unit 41 implements communication with the CU 1. The communication unit 41 is an interface connected to the CU 1 via a communication network such as a LAN or a wide area network (WAN).
 記憶部43は、操作端末4が後述する情報処理を実現するために必要な情報を記憶する。記憶部43は、例えば、RAM、ROM、ハードディスクなどで構成される。記憶部43に記憶される情報は、CU1から読み出される各種データベースや、後述する発話要求リストなどである。 The storage unit 43 stores information necessary for the operation terminal 4 to realize information processing to be described later. The storage unit 43 includes, for example, a RAM, a ROM, a hard disk, and the like. The information stored in the storage unit 43 includes various databases read from the CU 1 and a speech request list described later.
 表示部44は、制御部46からの指示(制御)に応じて、会議システムSの操作画面、各種データベース、発話要求リストなどを表示する。表示部44は、例えば、LCDなどのディスプレイである。 The display unit 44 displays an operation screen of the conference system S, various databases, a speech request list, and the like according to an instruction (control) from the control unit 46. The display unit 44 is, for example, a display such as an LCD.
 操作部45は、システム管理者などによる操作端末4の操作に応じた検出信号を制御部46に出力する。操作部45は、例えば、キーボード、マウス、ソフトウェアキーボードなどである。 The operation unit 45 outputs, to the control unit 46, a detection signal corresponding to the operation of the operation terminal 4 by a system administrator or the like. The operation unit 45 is, for example, a keyboard, a mouse, a software keyboard, and the like.
 制御部46は、操作端末4の動作の制御を行う。制御部46は、例えば、CPUなどのマイクロプロセッサと、その周辺回路と、から構成される。 The control unit 46 controls the operation of the operation terminal 4. The control unit 46 is configured of, for example, a microprocessor such as a CPU and its peripheral circuits.
 なお、操作端末4は、汎用の情報処理端末ではなく、会議システム専用の端末でもよい。 The operation terminal 4 may not be a general-purpose information processing terminal, and may be a terminal dedicated to a conference system.
 また、会議システムSは、少なくともCU1とDU2とマイクロホン3とを備えていればよい。すなわち、例えば、会議システムSは、操作端末4を備えなくともよい。 In addition, the conference system S may include at least CU1, DU2, and the microphone 3. That is, for example, the conference system S may not include the operation terminal 4.
●プライオリティ
 プライオリティは、例えば、システム管理者がCU1を介して各DU2に対して設定する情報であって、DU2の機能の制限に関するいわば優先権限である。プライオリティが設定されたDU2は、常に音声スロットと、前述の音声領域と、が割り当てられて、発話可能に制御される。発話可能に制御されたDU2は、マイクロホン3をオンにして音声情報をCU1に送信することができる。発話可能なDU2ごとのプライオリティの設定は、記憶部13のユニット設定情報DBに記憶される。
Priority Priority is, for example, information that a system administrator sets for each DU 2 via the CU 1 and is a so-called priority right regarding the restriction of the function of the DU 2. The priority-set DU 2 is always assigned a voice slot and the above-mentioned voice area, and is controlled to be able to speak. The speech-enabled DU 2 can turn on the microphone 3 to transmit voice information to the CU 1. The setting of the priority for each DU 2 that can speak is stored in the unit setting information DB of the storage unit 13.
 音声スロットは、会議システムSが備える複数のDU2の中で同時に発話可能なDU2の数を規定する、いわば枠である。会議システムSは、後述する最大話者設定数と同数、すなわち、前述の音声領域の数と同数の音声スロットを備える。会議システムSは、音声スロットごとに、個別の番号(例えば、1,2,3,・・・)を割り当てる。音声スロットは、例えば、CU1の制御部16に備えられる。 The voice slot is a frame that defines the number of DUs 2 that can simultaneously speak among the plurality of DUs 2 included in the conference system S. The conference system S includes the same number of voice slots as the maximum number of set talkers, which will be described later, that is, the same number as the number of voice areas described above. The conference system S assigns an individual number (for example, 1, 2, 3,...) To each voice slot. The voice slot is provided, for example, in the control unit 16 of CU1.
 CU1は、発話を許可するDU2ごとに、音声スロットと音声領域とを割り当てる。すなわち、CU1は、発話を許可するDU2ごとに、音声スロットの番号と、音声領域の番号と、を割り当てる。音声スロットと音声領域とが割り当てられたDU2は、発話可能となる。CU1は、音声スロットに割り当てられた番号と、音声領域に割り当てられた番号と、を関連付けて記憶部13に記憶する。CU1は、DU2に対して音声スロットと音声領域とを割り当てて、割り当てられた音声スロットの番号と音声領域の番号とを関連付けて、後述する音声情報の合成処理を行う。 CU1 allocates an audio slot and an audio area for each DU2 that permits speech. That is, CU1 assigns the number of the voice slot and the number of the voice area for each DU2 that permits speech. The DU 2 to which the voice slot and the voice area are assigned can be uttered. The CU 1 stores the number assigned to the voice slot and the number assigned to the voice area in the storage unit 13 in association with each other. The CU 1 assigns a voice slot and a voice area to the DU 2, associates the assigned voice slot number with the voice area number, and performs voice information synthesis processing described later.
 1のパケットのデータ部に含まれる複数の音声領域は、それぞれ別々のDU2に割り当てられる。換言すれば、CU1は、複数のDU2からの音声情報が格納された1のパケットを受信する。CU1は、音声情報が格納された音声領域の番号で、同音声情報を生成したDU2を特定する。CU1は、音声領域に割り当てられた番号に基づいて、音声スロットに割り当てられた番号を特定する。すなわち、CU1は、音声スロットの番号と音声領域の番号とで、発話可能なDU2それぞれに対応する音声スロットと音声領域とを特定する。CU1は、受信したパケットの音声領域に格納された音声情報を、同音声領域に対応する音声スロットを介して、受信する。CU1は、あるDU2から受信した音声情報を、そのDU2を含むCU1に接続する全てのDU2に送信する。 A plurality of voice areas included in the data portion of one packet are respectively assigned to different DUs. In other words, CU1 receives one packet in which voice information from a plurality of DU2s is stored. The CU 1 specifies the DU 2 that has generated the voice information by the number of the voice area in which the voice information is stored. CU1 identifies the number assigned to the voice slot based on the number assigned to the voice area. That is, CU1 specifies the voice slot and voice area corresponding to each of DU2 which can be uttered by the voice slot number and the voice area number. The CU 1 receives the voice information stored in the voice area of the received packet via the voice slot corresponding to the voice area. CU1 transmits voice information received from a certain DU2 to all DU2s connected to CU1 including that DU2.
 会議システムSは、会議システムSの情報処理の負荷の低減や、ネットワークのトラフィックの低減のため、同時に発話可能なDU2の数を制限する。同時に発話可能なDU2の最大数(以下「最大話者設定数」という。)は、例えば、マスターとなるCU1の設定に基づいて決定される。最大話者設定数は、CU1の接続台数に依存せず、会議システムS内で所定の台数に決定される。前述のとおり、発話可能なDU2は、音声スロットと音声領域とが割り当てられたDU2である。 The conference system S limits the number of DUs 2 that can simultaneously speak to reduce the information processing load of the conference system S and reduce the traffic of the network. The maximum number of DU2 that can be uttered at the same time (hereinafter referred to as “maximum speaker set number”) is determined based on, for example, the setting of CU1 as the master. The maximum speaker setting number is determined to be a predetermined number in the conference system S regardless of the number of connected CU1. As mentioned above, the speech-enabled DU2 is a DU2 to which a voice slot and a voice area are assigned.
 プライオリティが設定されるDU2(常に発話が可能なDU2)の数は、最大話者設定数よりも少なく設定される。これは、プライオリティの設定がされていないDU2からの発話要求も受け付けることができるように、会議システムSが音声スロットと音声領域との空きを確保するためである。 The number of DU2 (DU2 which can always speak) to which the priority is set is set to be smaller than the maximum speaker setting number. This is because the conference system S secures a space between the audio slot and the audio area so that it can also receive an utterance request from DU 2 for which priority is not set.
 プライオリティが設定されたDU2の優先権限は、第1権限と、第2権限と、第3権限と、第4権限と、の4段階の優先順位に分けられる。これらの権限は、例えば、他のDU2の一括ミュートが可能か否かと、他のDU2からの一括ミュートの対象となるか否かと、の組み合わせにより決定される。 The priority right of DU 2 to which the priority is set is divided into four levels of priority: first right, second right, third right, and fourth right. These authorities are determined, for example, by a combination of whether or not batch muting of another DU 2 is possible and whether or not to be a target of batch muting from another DU 2.
 第1権限は、一括ミュート可能、かつ、一括ミュートの対象とならない優先権限である。第1権限は、最高権限であり、例えば、会議の議長などに割り当てられるDU2に設定される。第2権限は、一括ミュート可能、かつ、一括ミュートの対象となる優先権限である。第2権限は、例えば、会議の副議長などに割り当てられるDU2に設定される。第3権限は、一括ミュート不可、かつ、一括ミュートの対象とならない優先権限である。第4権限は、一括ミュート不可、かつ、一括ミュートの対象となる優先権限である。 The first right is a priority right that can be muted and not subject to collective muting. The first right is the highest right, and is set to DU2 assigned to, for example, the chairperson of the conference. The second right is a priority right that can be batch muted and is subject to batch muting. The second authority is set to, for example, DU2 assigned to the deputy chairperson of the conference. The third right is a priority right that can not be batch muted and is not subject to batch muting. The fourth right is a priority right that can not be batch muted and is subject to batch muting.
 このように、本発明にかかる会議システムは、プライオリティの内訳を、DU2の使用者の権限に合わせて、適宜設定可能である。 As described above, in the conference system according to the present invention, the breakdown of the priority can be appropriately set in accordance with the authority of the user of DU2.
●会議システムの動作●
 次に、会議システムSの動作について説明する。会議システムSの動作、すなわち、会議システムSにより実行される情報処理は、CU1が1つの場合と、複数の場合と、で一部異なる。
● Operation of the conference system ●
Next, the operation of the conference system S will be described. The operation of the conference system S, that is, the information processing performed by the conference system S is partially different between the case of one CU 1 and the case of a plurality of CUs.
●1つのCUを備える会議システムの動作●
 先ず、1つのCUを備える会議システムSの動作について説明する。
● Operation of the conference system equipped with one CU ●
First, the operation of the conference system S including one CU will be described.
 図11は、1つのCUを備える会議システムSの情報処理を示すフローチャートである。
 会議システムSは、会議システムSの起動後に、初期化処理(S1)と、DU情報取得処理(S2)と、DU設定処理(S3)と、運用処理(S4)と、を実行する。
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing information processing of the conference system S including one CU.
After the conference system S is started, the conference system S executes an initialization process (S1), a DU information acquisition process (S2), a DU setting process (S3), and an operation process (S4).
 会議システムSにおいて、CU1は、ユニット接続部12bの全ての端子からパケットを送信する。そのため、パケットは、リング接続の場合において、DU2が接続されている2つの端子の双方向からDU2に送信される。以下の説明において、順方向は、リング接続されているCU1の端子における番号の小さい端子から番号の大きい端子に向かってパケットが流れる方向である。逆方向は順方向と反対の方向である。 In the conference system S, the CU 1 transmits packets from all the terminals of the unit connection unit 12 b. Therefore, in the case of ring connection, a packet is sent to DU2 from the bidirectional of the two terminals to which DU2 is connected. In the following description, the forward direction is the direction in which packets flow from the smaller-numbered terminal of the terminals of the CU 1 connected in a ring to the larger-numbered terminal. The reverse direction is the direction opposite to the forward direction.
 各端子が受信した各種パケットの情報は、CU1の制御部16により合成される。このとき、リング接続の場合には、いずれか一方の端子からの情報は、ミュート(無視)されて、制御部16による合成に用いられない。そのため、両方向からの情報の合成による重複は排除される。 Information of various packets received by each terminal is synthesized by the control unit 16 of CU1. At this time, in the case of ring connection, the information from one of the terminals is muted (ignored) and is not used for synthesis by the control unit 16. Therefore, duplication due to combining information from both directions is eliminated.
 DU2は、2つの端子のうち、一方の端子(「a」とする。)でパケットを受信して、他方の端子(「b」とする。)からパケットを送信する。順方向においてパケットを送信する端子(b)は逆方向においてパケットを受信し、順方向においてパケットを受信する端子(a)は逆方向においてパケットを送信する。 DU2 receives a packet at one of the two terminals (referred to as "a") and transmits the packet from the other terminal (referred to as "b"). Terminal (b), which transmits packets in the forward direction, receives packets in the reverse direction, and terminal (a), which receives packets in the forward direction, transmits packets in the reverse direction.
 以下、図11の各処理について、図1のCU1Aと、CU1Aに接続されたDU2A1-2A4と、を例に説明する。DU2A1はCU1Aの第1端子に接続され、DU2A4はCU1Aの第2端子に接続される。 Hereinafter, each process of FIG. 11 will be described using CU1A of FIG. 1 and DU2A1-2A4 connected to CU1A as an example. DU2A1 is connected to the first terminal of CU1A, and DU2A4 is connected to the second terminal of CU1A.
●初期化処理
 先ず、会議システムSは、初期化処理(S1)を行う。初期化処理(S1)は、CU1に接続されているDU2のユニット設定(情報)を初期化すると共に、CU1に接続されているDU2の接続方式と、接続台数と、を会議システムSが認識(特定)する処理である。
Initialization Process First, the conference system S performs an initialization process (S1). The initialization process (S1) initializes the unit setting (information) of DU2 connected to CU1, and the conference system S recognizes the connection method of DU2 connected to CU1 and the number of connected devices (S1). Processing).
 図12は、初期化処理(S1)におけるCU1Aの情報処理を示すフローチャートである。
 図13は、初期化処理(S1)における会議システムSの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the information processing of the CU 1A in the initialization process (S1).
FIG. 13 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in the initialization process (S1).
 CU1Aの制御部16は、DU2A1-2A4の初期化を行う初期化コマンドを通信部11に送信する。通信部11は、初期化コマンドを乗せた(含む)初期化パケットを、第1端子からDU2A1に送信する(S11a)。前述のとおり、パケットは、ヘッド部にカウンタフラグを含む。カウンタフラグは、パケットがDU2に伝送されるたびに、パケットを受信したDU2によりカウント値がインクリメント(「1」加算)される情報である。制御部16は、DU2に対して送信するパケットに含まれるカウンタフラグのカウント値を初期化するためにリセットする。すなわち、CU1AからDU2A1に送信される初期化パケットのカウンタフラグのカウント値は、「0」である。 The control unit 16 of the CU 1 A transmits, to the communication unit 11, an initialization command for initializing DU 2 A 1 to 2 A 4. The communication unit 11 transmits the initialization packet carrying (including) the initialization command from the first terminal to DU 2 A 1 (S 11 a). As mentioned above, the packet includes a counter flag in the head. The counter flag is information in which the count value is incremented ("1" is added) by DU2 which has received the packet each time the packet is transmitted to DU2. The control unit 16 resets the count value of the counter flag included in the packet to be transmitted to DU 2 to initialize it. That is, the count value of the counter flag of the initialization packet transmitted from CU1A to DU2A1 is “0”.
 初期化パケットを受信したDU2A1は、初期化コマンドに従いユニット設定を初期化、すなわち、記憶部23のユニット設定情報を初期値に更新する。初期化パケットを受信したDU2A1の制御部26は、カウンタフラグのカウント値をインクリメントする(S12a)。DU2A1の通信部21は、カウンタフラグのカウント値が「1」の初期化パケットをDU2A2に送信する。 The DU 2 A 1 having received the initialization packet initializes the unit setting according to the initialization command, that is, updates the unit setting information of the storage unit 23 to the initial value. The control unit 26 of DU 2 A 1 having received the initialization packet increments the count value of the counter flag (S 12 a). The communication unit 21 of DU2A1 transmits the initialization packet whose count value of the counter flag is “1” to DU2A2.
 初期化パケットを受信したDU2A2は、初期化コマンドに従いユニット設定を初期化、すなわち、記憶部23のユニット設定情報を初期値に更新する。初期化パケットを受信したDU2A2の制御部26は、カウンタフラグのカウント値をインクリメントする(S13a)。DU2A2の通信部21は、カウンタフラグのカウント値が「2」の初期化パケットをDU2A3に送信する。 The DU 2 A 2 having received the initialization packet initializes the unit setting according to the initialization command, that is, updates the unit setting information of the storage unit 23 to the initial value. The control unit 26 of DU 2 A 2 having received the initialization packet increments the count value of the counter flag (S 13 a). The communication unit 21 of DU2A2 transmits the initialization packet whose count value of the counter flag is “2” to DU2A3.
 初期化パケットを受信したDU2A3は、初期化コマンドに従いユニット設定を初期化、すなわち、記憶部23のユニット設定情報を初期値に更新する。初期化パケットを受信したDU2A3の制御部26は、カウンタフラグのカウント値をインクリメントする(S14a)。DU2A3の通信部21は、カウンタフラグのカウント値が「3」の初期化パケットをDU2A4に送信する。 The DU 2 A 3 having received the initialization packet initializes the unit setting according to the initialization command, that is, updates the unit setting information of the storage unit 23 to the initial value. The control unit 26 of DU 2 A 3 having received the initialization packet increments the count value of the counter flag (S 14 a). The communication unit 21 of DU2A3 transmits the initialization packet whose count value of the counter flag is "3" to DU2A4.
 初期化パケットを受信したDU2A4は、初期化コマンドに従いユニット設定を初期化、すなわち、記憶部23のユニット設定情報を初期値に更新する。初期化パケットを受信したDU2A4の制御部26は、カウンタフラグのカウント値をインクリメントする(S15a)。DU2A4の通信部21は、カウンタフラグのカウント値が「4」の初期化パケットをCU1Aの第2端子に送信する。 The DU 2 A 4 having received the initialization packet initializes the unit setting according to the initialization command, that is, updates the unit setting information of the storage unit 23 to the initial value. The control unit 26 of DU 2 A 4 having received the initialization packet increments the count value of the counter flag (S 15 a). The communication unit 21 of DU 2 A 4 transmits the initialization packet whose count value of the counter flag is “4” to the second terminal of CU 1 A.
 通信部11は、第2端子を介してDU2A4から初期化パケットを受信する(S16a)。 The communication unit 11 receives the initialization packet from DU 2 A 4 via the second terminal (S 16 a).
 前述のとおり、リング接続の場合、初期化パケット(カウンタフラグの初期値が「0」)は、第2端子から逆方向にも送信される。 As described above, in the case of ring connection, the initialization packet (the initial value of the counter flag is “0”) is also transmitted in the reverse direction from the second terminal.
 図14は、初期化処理(S1)における会議システムSの情報処理を示す別のシーケンス図である。
 初期化パケットは、CU1Aの第2端子からDU2A4、DU2A3、DU2A2、DU2A1、CU1の第1端子の順に、逆方向に伝送される。
FIG. 14 is another sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in the initialization process (S1).
The initialization packet is transmitted from the second terminal of CU1A in the reverse direction in the order of DU2A4, DU2A3, DU2A2, DU2A1, and CU1 first terminal.
 通信部11は、初期化コマンドを乗せた初期化パケットを、第2端子からDU2A4に送信する(S11b)。 The communication unit 11 transmits the initialization packet carrying the initialization command from the second terminal to DU 2 A 4 (S 11 b).
 DU2A4は、ユニット設定を初期化すると共に、カウンタフラグのカウント値をインクリメントする(S12b)。DU2A3は、ユニット設定を初期化すると共に、カウンタフラグのカウント値をインクリメントする(S13b)。DU2A2は、ユニット設定を初期化すると共に、カウンタフラグのカウント値をインクリメントする(S14b)。DU2A1は、ユニット設定を初期化すると共に、カウンタフラグのカウント値をインクリメントする(S15b)。 The DU 2 A 4 initializes the unit setting and increments the count value of the counter flag (S 12 b). The DU 2 A 3 initializes the unit setting and increments the count value of the counter flag (S 13 b). The DU 2 A 2 initializes the unit setting and increments the count value of the counter flag (S 14 b). The DU 2 A 1 initializes the unit setting and increments the count value of the counter flag (S 15 b).
 通信部11は、第1端子を介してDU2A1から初期化パケットを受信する(S16b)。 The communication unit 11 receives the initialization packet from DU 2 A 1 via the first terminal (S 16 b).
 制御部16は、通信部11が受信した初期化パケットに含まれるカウンタフラグのカウント値などの情報を記憶部13に記憶する。 The control unit 16 stores information such as the count value of the counter flag included in the initialization packet received by the communication unit 11 in the storage unit 13.
 図15は、初期化処理(S1)における会議システムSの初期化パケット受信後の情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。 FIG. 15 is a sequence diagram showing information processing after receiving the initialization packet of the conference system S in the initialization processing (S1).
 制御部16は、端子ごとのDU2の接続状態、すなわち、DU2の接続方式と接続台数とを認識する(S17)。DU2の接続方式の認識は、例えば、パケットを送受信したユニット接続部12bの端子が一致するか否か(端子番号の異同)により行われる。すなわち、パケットを送信した端子と受信した端子とが一致するとき、DU2の接続方式は、デイジー接続である。一方、パケットを送信した端子と受信した端子とが一致しないとき、DU2の接続方式は、リング接続である。例えば、前述のとおり、DU2A1-2A4に対する順方向の初期化パケットは、CU1Aの第1端子から送信されて、第2端子で受信される。つまり、CU1Aが初期化パケットを送信した端子番号は、CU1Aが初期化パケットを受信した端子番号と一致しない(異なる)。一方、逆方向の初期化パケットの送受信においても、CU1Aが初期化パケットを送信した端子(第2端子)番号は、CU1Aが初期化パケットを受信した端子(第1端子)番号と一致しない(異なる)。そのため、制御部16は、DU2A1-2A4の接続方式がリング接続である、と認識する。 The control unit 16 recognizes the connection state of DU 2 for each terminal, that is, the connection method of DU 2 and the number of connected terminals (S 17). The recognition of the connection method of the DU 2 is performed, for example, based on whether or not the terminals of the unit connection unit 12 b that transmitted and received the packet match (difference in terminal number). That is, when the terminal that has transmitted the packet and the terminal that has received the packet match, the connection method of DU 2 is daisy connection. On the other hand, when the terminal that has transmitted the packet and the terminal that has received the packet do not match, the connection method of DU 2 is ring connection. For example, as described above, the forward initialization packet for DU2A1-2A4 is sent from the first terminal of CU1A and received at the second terminal. That is, the terminal number at which the CU 1A has transmitted the initialization packet does not match (different from) the terminal number at which the CU 1A has received the initialization packet. On the other hand, also in transmission and reception of the initialization packet in the reverse direction, the terminal (second terminal) number at which CU1A transmitted the initialization packet does not match the terminal (first terminal) number at which CU1A received the initialization packet (different) ). Therefore, the control unit 16 recognizes that the connection method of the DU 2 A 1-2 A 4 is ring connection.
 DU2の接続台数は、全ての端子が送受信した初期化パケットのカウンタフラグのカウント値により認識される。すなわち、例えば、CU1Aの第1端子と第2端子との間を送信された初期化パケットは、カウンタフラグのカウント値が「4」でCU1Aに戻る。そのため、制御部16は、第1端子と第2端子との間に接続されたDU2の数が「4」である、と認識する。このように、パケットに含まれるカウンタフラグは、CU1に接続されたDU2の数のカウントに用いられる。 The number of connected DU2 is recognized by the count value of the counter flag of the initialization packet transmitted / received by all the terminals. That is, for example, the initialization packet transmitted between the first terminal and the second terminal of CU1A returns to CU1A when the count value of the counter flag is "4". Therefore, the control unit 16 recognizes that the number of DU2 connected between the first terminal and the second terminal is "4". Thus, the counter flag included in the packet is used to count the number of DU2 connected to CU1.
 制御部16は、DU2の接続方式と接続台数とを認識したとき、各DU2のID(以下「相対ID」という。)を生成する(S18)。相対IDは、例えば、ユニット接続部12bの端子番号の小さい側に接続されたDU2から順に採番されて、各DU2に割り当てられる。すなわち、例えば、DU2A1の相対IDは「1」であり、DU2A4の相対IDは「4」である。 When the control unit 16 recognizes the connection method and the number of connected DUs, the control unit 16 generates an ID of each DU 2 (hereinafter referred to as “relative ID”) (S18). The relative ID is assigned, for example, sequentially from the DU 2 connected to the small terminal number side of the unit connection portion 12 b and assigned to each DU 2. That is, for example, the relative ID of DU2A1 is “1”, and the relative ID of DU2A4 is “4”.
 制御部16は、認識したDU2の接続方式と接続台数と、割り当てられた相対IDと、を関連付けて記憶部13のユニット接続情報DBに記憶する(S19)。 The control unit 16 associates the recognized connection method and the number of connected DUs with the assigned relative ID, and stores them in the unit connection information DB of the storage unit 13 (S19).
 図16は、初期化処理(S1)後のCU1の記憶部13に記憶される情報を示す模式図である。
 同図は、CU1の第3端子と第4端子とが、DU2と接続していない非接続の状態であることを示す。
FIG. 16 is a schematic view showing information stored in the storage unit 13 of the CU 1 after the initialization process (S1).
This figure shows that the third and fourth terminals of CU1 are not connected to DU2 and not connected.
 なお、DU2の接続方式がデイジー接続の場合、末端のDU2は、同DU2の2つの端子のうち、一方の端子からの受信が無いことを理由に、自己が末端であると判断する。末端のDU2は、折り返しである旨のフラグ(以下「折返しフラグ」という。)を初期化パケットに付与して、初期化パケットを折り返す。すなわち、DU2は、接続方式に関わらず、双方向に情報の送受信を行う。DU2は、折返しフラグが付与された初期化パケットのカウンタフラグのカウント値のインクリメントは行わない。 When the connection method of DU2 is a daisy connection, it is determined that the terminal DU2 is the terminal DU because there is no reception from one of the two terminals of the DU2. The terminal DU 2 attaches a flag (hereinafter referred to as “loopback flag”) to the effect that it is a loop back to the initialization packet, and loops back the initialization packet. That is, DU 2 transmits and receives information bidirectionally regardless of the connection method. DU2 does not increment the count value of the counter flag of the initialization packet to which the return flag is added.
 このとき、制御部16は、カウンタフラグのカウント値により、DU2の接続台数を認識する。制御部16は、初期化パケットを送受信したユニット接続部12bの端子番号が一致するため、DU2の接続方式がデイジー接続であると認識する。 At this time, the control unit 16 recognizes the number of connected DUs 2 based on the count value of the counter flag. The control unit 16 recognizes that the connection method of the DU 2 is a daisy connection because the terminal numbers of the unit connection unit 12 b that transmitted and received the initialization packet match.
●DU情報取得処理
 図11に戻る。
 次いで、会議システムSは、DU情報取得処理(S2)を実行する。DU情報取得処理(S2)は、DU2のユニット情報を取得する処理である。ユニット情報は、DU2のシリアルナンバー(絶対ID)やMAC(Media Access Control)アドレスなどである。以下の説明において、順方向の処理は逆方向の処理と同じであるため、逆方向の処理については、説明を省略する。
DU Information Acquisition Process Return to FIG.
Next, the conference system S executes a DU information acquisition process (S2). The DU information acquisition process (S2) is a process of acquiring unit information of DU2. The unit information is, for example, the serial number (absolute ID) of DU 2 or a MAC (Media Access Control) address. In the following description, the processing in the forward direction is the same as the processing in the reverse direction, and thus the description of the processing in the reverse direction is omitted.
 図17は、DU情報取得処理(S2)におけるCU1Aの情報処理を示すフローチャートである。
 図18は、DU情報取得処理(S2)における会議システムSの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing information processing of the CU 1A in DU information acquisition processing (S2).
FIG. 18 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in DU information acquisition processing (S2).
 制御部16は、DU2A1-2A4のユニット情報を取得する情報取得コマンドを通信部11に送信する。通信部11は、情報取得コマンドを乗せた情報取得パケットを各DU2A1-1A4に送信する(S21a-S21d)。情報取得パケットは、相対IDによりアドレス指定される。そのため、アドレス指定されたDU2のみが情報取得パケットを受信する。 The control unit 16 transmits, to the communication unit 11, an information acquisition command for acquiring the unit information of DU 2 A 1-2 A 4. The communication unit 11 transmits an information acquisition packet carrying an information acquisition command to each DU 2 A 1-1 A 4 (S 21 a -S 21 d). The information acquisition packet is addressed by relative ID. Therefore, only the addressed DU 2 receives the information acquisition packet.
 情報取得コマンドを受信した各DU2A1-2A4は、情報取得コマンドに従い、ユニット情報を乗せた情報取得パケットをCU1Aに送信する(S22a-S22d)。 Each DU 2 A 1-2 A 4 that has received the information acquisition command transmits an information acquisition packet carrying unit information to the CU 1 A according to the information acquisition command (S 22 a-S 22 d).
 通信部11は、各DU2A1-2A4からの情報取得パケットを受信する(S23a-S23d)。 The communication unit 11 receives the information acquisition packet from each of the DUs 2A1-2A4 (S23a-S23d).
 制御部16は、通信部11が受信した情報取得パケットからユニット情報を読み出す。制御部16は、ユニット情報から絶対IDを取得する(S24)。制御部16は、取得した絶対IDと、相対IDと、を関連付けて記憶部13のユニット接続情報DBに記憶する(S25)。制御部16が絶対IDを取得したことで、DU情報取得処理(S2)より後の処理について、絶対IDを用いたDU2のアドレス指定が可能となる。 The control unit 16 reads unit information from the information acquisition packet received by the communication unit 11. The control unit 16 acquires an absolute ID from the unit information (S24). The control unit 16 associates the acquired absolute ID and relative ID with each other, and stores the unit connection information DB of the storage unit 13 (S25). Since the control unit 16 has acquired the absolute ID, it becomes possible to specify the address of DU 2 using the absolute ID in the processing after the DU information acquisition processing (S 2).
 なお、DU情報取得処理(S2)において、新たに接続されたDU2が存在するときは、制御部16がユニット設定情報DBを記憶部13から読み出して、そのDU2の絶対IDと、設定情報(初期値)と、を関連付けてユニット設定情報DBに記憶させる。 In the DU information acquisition process (S2), when there is a newly connected DU2, the control unit 16 reads the unit setting information DB from the storage unit 13, and the absolute ID of the DU2 and the setting information (initial The unit setting information DB is stored in association with the value).
 図19は、DU情報取得処理後のCU1の記憶部13に記憶される情報を示す模式図である。
 同図は、端子番号「1」「2」にリング接続された4台のDU2の相対ID「1」「2」「3」「4」が、絶対ID「A」「B」「C」「D」と関連付けられていることを示す。
FIG. 19 is a schematic view showing information stored in the storage unit 13 of the CU 1 after the DU information acquisition processing.
In the figure, relative IDs “1” “2” “3” “4” of four DU2 ring-connected to terminal numbers “1” “2” are absolute IDs “A” “B” “C” “ Indicates that it is associated with "D".
 絶対IDと相対IDとが関連付けられることで、CU1は、どの相対IDにどの絶対IDのDU2が接続されているかを示す情報を、例えば、システム管理者などに操作端末4などを介して報知可能となる。そのため、システム管理者は、例えば、操作端末4を操作して、絶対IDと、DU2の使用者名(固有名詞)と、を関連付けて記憶部13に記憶させることができ、固有名詞でDU2を管理できる。また、システム管理者は、例えば、相対IDと、DU2の使用者名と、を関連付けて記憶部13に記憶させることで、会議室の座席ごとの固有名詞を操作端末4の表示部44などに表示できる。 By associating the absolute ID and the relative ID, the CU 1 can notify, for example, the system administrator via the operation terminal 4 etc., information indicating which relative ID the DU 2 of which absolute ID is connected to which relative ID It becomes. Therefore, the system administrator can, for example, operate the operation terminal 4 to associate the absolute ID with the user name (proper noun) of DU2 and store the same in the storage unit 13, and the proper noun DU2. It can manage. Further, the system administrator associates the relative ID with the user name of DU 2 and stores the same in the storage unit 13, for example, to display the proper noun for each seat of the conference room in the display unit 44 of the operation terminal 4 or the like. It can be displayed.
●DU設定処理
 図11に戻る。
 次いで、会議システムSは、DU設定処理(S3)を実行する。DU設定処理(S3)は、ユニット設定情報DBに基づいて、DU2の設定を行う処理である。以下の説明において、順方向の処理は逆方向の処理と同じであるため、逆方向の処理については、説明を省略する。
● DU setting process Return to FIG.
Next, the conference system S executes a DU setting process (S3). The DU setting process (S3) is a process of setting DU2 based on the unit setting information DB. In the following description, the processing in the forward direction is the same as the processing in the reverse direction, and thus the description of the processing in the reverse direction is omitted.
 図20は、DU設定処理(S3)におけるCU1Aの情報処理を示すフローチャートである。
 図21は、DU設定処理(S3)における会議システムSの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing information processing of CU 1 A in DU setting processing (S 3).
FIG. 21 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in DU setting processing (S3).
 制御部16は、記憶部13からユニット設定情報DBを読み出して(S31)、DU2の設定を行うユニット設定コマンドを通信部11に送信する。通信部11は、ユニット設定コマンドを乗せた設定パケットを、各DU2A1-2A4に送信する(S32a-S32d)。設定パケットは、DU2の絶対IDをパケットの送信先として含む。すなわち、設定パケットの送信先は、絶対IDによりアドレス指定される。そのため、CU1に接続されたDU2のうち、アドレス指定されたDU2のみが設定パケットを受信する。 The control unit 16 reads the unit setting information DB from the storage unit 13 (S31), and transmits a unit setting command for setting DU2 to the communication unit 11. The communication unit 11 transmits the setting packet carrying the unit setting command to each of the DU 2 A 1-2 A 4 (S 32 a -S 32 d). The setup packet includes the absolute ID of DU2 as the destination of the packet. That is, the transmission destination of the setting packet is addressed by the absolute ID. Therefore, among DUs 2 connected to CU 1, only the addressed DU 2 receives the configuration packet.
 設定パケットを受信した各DU2A1-2A4は、ユニット設定コマンドに従い、ユニット設定を変更する(S33a-S33d)。各DU2A1-2A4は、記憶部23のユニット設定情報を更新する。ユニット設定は、例えば、プライオリティの設定や、後述するマイクオントリガーの設定、発光部28の発光色の設定など、DU2ごとの動作を規定する情報である。 Each DU 2 A 1-2 A 4 having received the setting packet changes the unit setting according to the unit setting command (S 33 a -S 33 d). Each DU 2 A 1-2 A 4 updates the unit setting information of the storage unit 23. The unit setting is information defining an operation for each DU 2 such as setting of priority, setting of microphone on trigger described later, setting of light emission color of the light emitting unit 28, and the like.
 通信部11は、ユニット設定を変更した各DU2A1-2A4から設定パケットを受信する(S34a-S34d)。このとき、設定パケットは、各DU2A1-2A4がコマンドを正しく取得したことを示す情報を含む。 The communication unit 11 receives the setting packet from each DU 2 A 1-2 A 4 whose unit setting has been changed (S 34 a-S 34 d). At this time, the setting packet includes information indicating that each DU 2 A 1-2 A 4 has correctly acquired a command.
 DU設定処理(S3)が完了すると、会議システムSの運用(例えば、各DU2からの音声情報の取得など)が可能となる。 When the DU setting process (S3) is completed, operation of the conference system S (for example, acquisition of audio information from each DU 2 and the like) becomes possible.
●運用処理
 図11に戻る。
 次いで、会議システムSは、運用処理(S4)を実行する。運用処理(S4)は、定期的(例えば、166μ秒ごと)に運用パケットをCU1からDU2に送信して、運用パケットに乗せられた各種コマンドを実行すると共に、カウンタフラグによりDU2の接続状態を監視する処理である。
Operation Process Return to FIG.
Next, the conference system S executes an operation process (S4). The operation processing (S4) periodically transmits the operation packet from CU1 to DU2 periodically (for example, every 166 μs), executes various commands carried in the operation packet, and monitors the connection status of DU2 by the counter flag. Processing.
 各種コマンドは、例えば、音声取得コマンドなどである。音声取得コマンドは、CU1が音声スロットと音声領域とが割り当てられたDU2からの音声情報の取得を行うコマンドである。 The various commands are, for example, voice acquisition commands. The voice acquisition command is a command for acquiring voice information from DU 2 to which CU 1 is assigned a voice slot and a voice area.
 なお、前述のとおり、運用パケットは、制御コマンドを乗せない(含まない)場合がある。この場合であっても、運用パケットは、CU1とDU2との間で繰り返し送受信される。すなわち、CU1は、制御コマンドの有無に関わらず、運用パケットに含まれるカウンタフラグを用いて、DU2の接続状態を監視する。 As described above, the operation packet may not carry (do not include) the control command. Even in this case, the operation packet is repeatedly transmitted and received between CU1 and DU2. That is, CU <b> 1 monitors the connection state of DU <b> 2 using the counter flag included in the operation packet regardless of the presence or absence of the control command.
 図22は、運用処理(S4)におけるCU1Aの情報処理を示すフローチャートである。
 図23は、運用処理(S4)における会議システムSの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。
 以下、運用処理(S4)について、音声スロットと音声領域とが割り当てられたDU2A2からの音声情報の取得を例に説明する。音声スロットと音声領域との割り当てについては、後述する。
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing information processing of the CU 1A in the operation processing (S4).
FIG. 23 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in the operation processing (S4).
Hereinafter, the operation processing (S4) will be described by taking acquisition of voice information from DU 2 A 2 to which a voice slot and a voice area are allocated as an example. The assignment of voice slots and voice areas will be described later.
 制御部16は、音声取得コマンドを通信部11に送信する。通信部11は、音声取得コマンドを乗せた運用パケットを、音声スロットと音声領域とが割り当てられたDU2A2に送信する(S41)。 The control unit 16 transmits a voice acquisition command to the communication unit 11. The communication unit 11 transmits the operation packet carrying the voice acquisition command to the DU 2 A 2 to which the voice slot and the voice area are assigned (S 41).
 運用パケットを受信したDU2A2の通信部21は、音声取得コマンドに従い、運用パケットの音声領域のうち、自らに割り当てられた番号の音声領域に音声情報を乗せて、CU1Aに送信する(S42)。 The communication unit 21 of DU 2 A 2 that has received the operation packet places the voice information in the voice area of the number assigned to itself among the voice area of the operation packet according to the voice acquisition command and transmits it to CU 1 A (S 42).
 ここで、図示しないが、カウンタフラグのカウント値は、初期化処理(S1)と同様に、CU1Aにおいてリセットされて、各DU2A1-2A4においてインクリメントされる。 Here, although not shown, the count value of the counter flag is reset in CU 1 A and incremented in each DU 2 A 1-2 A 4 as in the initialization process (S 1).
 CU1Aは、DU2A2からの運用パケットを受信する(S43)。通信部11は、ユニット接続部12bの全ての端子が受信したカウンタフラグのカウント値や音声情報などの情報を制御部16へ送信する。音声情報は、音声情報が格納されていた音声領域の番号と同一の番号の音声スロットが受信する。音声情報の処理については、後述する。制御部16は、カウンタフラグのカウント値と、運用パケットを送受信した端子番号と、からDU2の接続状態(接続方式と接続台数)を確認(特定)する(S44)。この確認は、通信部11が運用パケットを受信するごとに実行される。 The CU 1A receives the operation packet from the DU 2 A 2 (S 43). The communication unit 11 transmits information such as the count value of the counter flag and the voice information received by all the terminals of the unit connection unit 12 b to the control unit 16. The voice information is received by the voice slot of the same number as the voice area number in which the voice information is stored. The processing of voice information will be described later. The control unit 16 confirms (specifies) the connection state (connection method and number of connected units) of the DU 2 from the count value of the counter flag and the terminal number that has transmitted and received the operation packet (S44). This confirmation is performed each time the communication unit 11 receives an operation packet.
 DU2の接続台数の確認は、新たに取得したカウンタフラグのカウント値(以下「新DUカウント値」という。)と、記憶部13に記憶されているカウント値(以下「旧DUカウント値」という。)と、を比較することにより実行される。すなわち、新DUカウント値と旧DUカウント値とが一致するとき、制御部16は、DU2の接続台数に変更が無いと判定する。一方、新DUカウント値と旧DUカウント値とが一致しないとき(不一致のとき)、制御部16は、DU2の接続台数に変更が有ると判定する。 The confirmation of the number of connected DUs is referred to as the newly acquired count value of the counter flag (hereinafter referred to as “new DU count value”) and the count value stored in the storage unit 13 (hereinafter referred to as “old DU count value”). Is performed by comparing. That is, when the new DU count value matches the old DU count value, the control unit 16 determines that there is no change in the number of connected DUs. On the other hand, when the new DU count value and the old DU count value do not match (when they do not match), the control unit 16 determines that there is a change in the number of connected DUs.
 前述のとおり、DU2の接続方式の確認は、運用パケットを送信した端子の端子番号と、運用パケットを受信した端子の端子番号と、を比較することにより実行される。すなわち、運用パケットを送受信した端子の端子番号が一致するとき、制御部16は、DU2の接続方式がデイジー接続であると判定する。一方、運用パケットを送受信した端子の端子番号が一致しないとき(不一致のとき)、制御部16は、DU2の接続方式がリング接続であると判定する。 As described above, the confirmation of the connection method of DU 2 is performed by comparing the terminal number of the terminal that has transmitted the operation packet with the terminal number of the terminal that has received the operation packet. That is, when the terminal numbers of the terminals that have transmitted and received the operation packet match, the control unit 16 determines that the connection method of DU 2 is daisy connection. On the other hand, when the terminal numbers of the terminals that have transmitted and received the operation packet do not match (when they do not match), the control unit 16 determines that the connection method of DU 2 is ring connection.
 制御部16は、ユニット接続情報DBを記憶部13から読み出して、ユニット接続情報DBに記憶されたDU2の接続方式と、新たに取得したDU2の接続方式と、を比較する。制御部16は、両接続方式が一致する(同じ)ときDU2の接続方式に変更が無いと判定し、両接続方式が一致しない(異なる)ときDU2の接続方式に変更が有ると判定する。 The control unit 16 reads the unit connection information DB from the storage unit 13, and compares the connection method of DU2 stored in the unit connection information DB with the connection method of DU2 newly acquired. The control unit 16 determines that there is no change in the connection method of DU2 when both connection methods coincide (same), and determines that there is a change in the connection method of DU2 when both connection methods do not match (different).
 制御部16は、DU2の接続台数と、DU2の接続方式と、のいずれかに変更が有ると判定したとき、DU2の接続状態に変更が有ると判定する。すなわち、制御部16は、新DUカウント値と旧DUカウント値とが不一致のとき、DU2の接続状態に変更が有ると判定する。一方、制御部16は、いずれにも変更が無いと判定したとき、DU2の接続状態に変更が無いと判定する。 The control unit 16 determines that there is a change in the connection state of DU 2 when it determines that there is a change in either the number of connected DU 2 or the connection method of DU 2. That is, when the new DU count value and the old DU count value do not match, the control unit 16 determines that there is a change in the connection state of DU2. On the other hand, when determining that there is no change in any of the control units 16, the control unit 16 determines that there is no change in the connection state of DU2.
 DU2の接続状態に変更が有るとき(S44の「はい」)、会議システムSは、変更処理(S5)を実行する。変更処理(S5)については、後述する。 When there is a change in the connection state of DU 2 (“YES” in S 44), the conference system S executes a change process (S 5). The change process (S5) will be described later.
 図24は、DU2の接続状態に変更が有るときの会議システムSの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。
 同図は、DU2A3が故障や取り外しなどにより接続異常となった例を示す。同図は、説明の便宜上、コマンドを乗せていない運用パケットの順方向の処理のみを示す。
FIG. 24 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S when there is a change in the connection state of DU2.
The figure shows an example in which the connection abnormality occurs due to a failure or removal of DU 2 A 3. This figure shows only forward processing of the operation packet not carrying a command, for convenience of explanation.
 CU1Aの通信部11は、第1端子を介してDU2A1に運用パケットを送信する(S41a)。DU2A1は、受信した運用パケットのカウンタフラグのカウント値をインクリメントして(S42a)、DU2A2に運用パケットを送信する。DU2A2は、受信した運用パケットのカウンタフラグのカウント値をインクリメントする(S42b)。 The communication unit 11 of the CU 1 A transmits an operation packet to the DU 2 A 1 through the first terminal (S 41 a). The DU 2 A 1 increments the count value of the counter flag of the received operation packet (S 42 a), and transmits the operation packet to the DU 2 A 2. The DU 2 A 2 increments the count value of the counter flag of the received operation packet (S 42 b).
 DU2A3に接続異常が発生した場合、DU2A2は、一方の端子(逆方向)からの運用パケットの受信が無いことを理由に、自身が末端のDU2になったことを認識する。そのため、DU2A2は、運用パケットに折返しフラグを付与する(乗せる)(S42c)。DU2A2は、DU2A1を介して、折返しフラグが付与された運用パケットをCU1Aに送信する。このとき、DU2A1は、運用パケットに折返しフラグが付与されているため、前述のとおり、カウンタフラグのカウント値をインクリメントせずに、運用パケットの送受信のみを行う。 When a connection abnormality occurs in DU 2 A 3, DU 2 A 2 recognizes that it has become the terminal DU 2 because there is no reception of an operation packet from one terminal (in the reverse direction). Therefore, DU 2 A 2 adds (puts on) the return flag to the operation packet (S 42 c). The DU 2 A 2 transmits, to the CU 1 A, the operation packet to which the return flag is added via the DU 2 A 1. At this time, since the return packet is attached to the operation packet, the DU 2 A 1 transmits and receives only the operation packet without incrementing the count value of the counter flag as described above.
 一方、DU2A4は、逆方向の処理において、DU2A2と同様に、折返しフラグが付与された運用パケットをCU1Aに送信する(不図示)。 On the other hand, the DU 2 A 4 transmits the operation packet to which the return flag is added to the CU 1 A (not shown) in the reverse direction processing, similarly to the DU 2 A 2.
 CU1Aの制御部16は、運用パケットが送受信された端子の端子番号が同じとなっていることを理由に、DU2A1-2A4の接続方式の変更(リング接続からデイジー接続への変更)を認識する。制御部16は、運用パケットのカウンタフラグのカウント値の比較結果から同端子に接続されたDU2の接続台数の変更を認識する。制御部16は、この認識結果と、ユニット接続情報DBと、を照合して、DU2A1-2A4の接続状態の変更を認識する(S44)。 The control unit 16 of the CU 1 A recognizes the change of the connection method of DU 2 A 1-2 A 4 (change from ring connection to daisy connection) because the terminal numbers of the terminals through which the operation packet is transmitted and received are the same. The control unit 16 recognizes a change in the number of connected DUs 2 connected to the same terminal from the comparison result of the count value of the counter flag of the operation packet. The control unit 16 collates the recognition result with the unit connection information DB to recognize a change in the connection state of the DU 2 A 1-2 A 4 (S 44).
 このとき、制御部16は、第1端子が受信した運用パケットのカウンタフラグのカウント値「2」と、第2端子が受信した運用パケットのカウンタフラグのカウント値「1」と、からDU2A3に接続異常が発生したことを認識する。このように、CU1Aは、接続異常が発生した場合に、即座に接続異常の発生を認識すると共に、接続異常箇所を特定する。 At this time, the control unit 16 connects to DU 2 A 3 from the count value “2” of the counter flag of the operation packet received by the first terminal and the count value “1” of the counter flag of the operation packet received by the second terminal. Recognize that an anomaly has occurred. As described above, when a connection abnormality occurs, the CU 1A immediately recognizes the occurrence of the connection abnormality and identifies the connection abnormality point.
 図22と図23とに戻る。
 DU2の接続状態に変更が無いとき(S44の「いいえ」)、制御部16は、音声スロットにおいて全ての端子が受信した音声情報と、DU2の絶対IDに関連付けて記憶部13に記憶された情報と、を合成(処理)して、合成音声情報を生成する(S45)。音声情報の合成は、全ての端子が受信した各運用パケットの音声領域において、同じ番号の音声領域に格納された音声情報同士を合成することで実行される。
It returns to FIG. 22 and FIG.
When there is no change in the connection state of DU2 ("No" in S44), the control unit 16 stores the voice information received by all the terminals in the voice slot and the information stored in the storage unit 13 in association with the absolute ID of DU2. And are synthesized (processed) to generate synthesized speech information (S45). The synthesis of the voice information is performed by combining the voice information stored in the voice area of the same number in the voice area of each operation packet received by all the terminals.
 合成音声情報は、例えば、絶対IDに関連付けられたDU2の使用者(話者)の情報、時間情報、グループ情報などの情報を含む。合成音声情報は、例えば、CU1Aの外部機器接続部12aに接続されたUSBメモリなどに記憶されると共に、各DU2A1-2A4に送信される。各DU2A1-2A4に送信された合成音声情報は、各DU2A1-2A4の制御部26により処理された後、スピーカ27により音波に変換されて、スピーカ27から出力される。 The synthetic speech information includes, for example, information of the user (speaker) of DU 2 associated with the absolute ID, time information, group information and the like. The synthetic speech information is stored in, for example, a USB memory connected to the external device connection unit 12a of the CU 1A, and is also transmitted to each DU 2 A 1-2 A 4. The synthesized voice information transmitted to each DU 2 A 1-2 A 4 is processed by the control unit 26 of each DU 2 A 1-2 A 4, then converted into a sound wave by the speaker 27 and output from the speaker 27.
 合成音声情報の生成の際に、制御部16は、運用パケットのリクエストフラグの付与の有無を確認する(S46)。リクエストフラグについては、後述する。 When generating synthetic speech information, the control unit 16 confirms the presence or absence of the request flag of the operation packet (S46). The request flag will be described later.
 リクエストフラグが付与されているとき(S46の「はい」)、会議システムSは、リクエスト処理(S6)を実行する。リクエストフラグが付与されていないとき(S46の「いいえ」)、会議システムSは、運用処理(S4)を繰り返す。 When the request flag is assigned ("Yes" in S46), the conference system S executes request processing (S6). When the request flag is not assigned ("No" in S46), the conference system S repeats the operation process (S4).
●変更処理
 DU2の接続状態に変更が有るとき、会議システムSは、変更処理(S5)を実行する。変更処理(S5)は、DU2の接続状態の変更後に、ユニット接続情報DBに記憶されているユニット接続情報を更新して、音声情報の欠落や音声情報の合成処理の不具合を防ぐ処理である。
Change Process When there is a change in the connection state of DU2, the conference system S executes a change process (S5). The change process (S5) is a process of updating the unit connection information stored in the unit connection information DB after the change of the connection state of DU2 to prevent the loss of voice information and the defect in the synthesis process of voice information.
 図25は、変更処理(S5)におけるCU1Aの情報処理を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing information processing of the CU 1A in the change process (S5).
 変更処理(S5)は、ユニット接続情報DBに記憶されているユニット接続情報を更新するため、初期化処理(S1)と、DU情報取得処理(S2)と、DU設定処理(S3)と、を改めて実行する処理である。 The change process (S5) updates the unit connection information stored in the unit connection information DB, the initialization process (S1), the DU information acquisition process (S2), and the DU setting process (S3). It is a process to be executed again.
 図26は、変更処理(S5)における初期化処理(S1)の一例としての会議システムSの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。同図は、DU2A3が故障や取り外しなどにより接続異常となった状態を示す。同図は、説明の便宜上、順方向の処理のみを示す。 FIG. 26 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S as an example of the initialization process (S1) in the change process (S5). This figure shows a state in which the connection abnormality has occurred due to a failure or removal of DU 2 A 3. The figure shows only forward processing for the convenience of description.
 初期化処理(S1)において、CU1Aの通信部11は、第1端子を介して初期化パケットをDU2A1に送信すると共に、第2端子を介して初期化パケットをDU2A4に送信する。第1端子からの初期化パケットは、DU2A2において折り返される。このとき、DU2A2は、初期化パケットに折返しフラグを付与する(S131a)。一方、第2端子からの初期化パケットは、DU2A4において折り返される(不図示)。このとき、DU2A4は、初期化パケットに折返しフラグを付与する(不図示)。 In the initialization process (S1), the communication unit 11 of CU1A transmits the initialization packet to DU2A1 through the first terminal, and transmits the initialization packet to DU2A4 through the second terminal. The initialization packet from the first terminal is folded back at DU2A2. At this time, the DU 2 A 2 attaches a return flag to the initialization packet (S 131 a). On the other hand, the initialization packet from the second terminal is folded back at DU 2 A 4 (not shown). At this time, DU 2 A 4 assigns a return flag to the initialization packet (not shown).
 通信部11は、第1端子を介してDU2A1から初期化パケットを受信する(S16a)と共に、第2端子を介してDU2A4から初期化パケットを受信する。制御部16は、新DUカウント値を記憶部13に記憶する。このとき、制御部16は、新DUカウント値で旧DUカウント値を更新する。 The communication unit 11 receives the initialization packet from the DU 2 A 1 through the first terminal (S 16 a), and receives the initialization packet from the DU 2 A 4 through the second terminal. The control unit 16 stores the new DU count value in the storage unit 13. At this time, the control unit 16 updates the old DU count value with the new DU count value.
 制御部16は、CU1の端子ごとのDU2の接続状態、すなわち、DU2の接続方式と接続台数とを認識する(S17)。CU1の第1端子に接続されたDU2A1、DU2A2の接続方式と、同第2端子に接続されたDU2A4の接続方式とは、初期化パケットを送受信した端子が同じであるため、デイジー接続である。一方、第1端子に接続されたDU2の接続台数は2台であり、第2端子に接続されたDU2の接続台数は1台である。 The control unit 16 recognizes the connection state of DU 2 for each terminal of CU 1, that is, the connection method of DU 2 and the number of connected terminals (S 17). The connection method of DU 2 A 1 and DU 2 A 2 connected to the first terminal of CU 1 and the connection method of DU 2 A 4 connected to the second terminal are daisy connection since the terminals that transmitted and received the initialization packet are the same. On the other hand, the connected number of DU2 connected to the first terminal is two, and the connected number of DU2 connected to the second terminal is one.
 制御部16は、DU2の接続方式と接続台数とを認識したとき、各DU2の相対IDを生成する(S18)。 When the control unit 16 recognizes the connection method and the number of connected DU 2, the control unit 16 generates a relative ID of each DU 2 (S 18).
 制御部16は、DU2の接続方式と接続台数と相対IDとを関連付けて記憶部13のユニット接続情報DBに記憶する(S19)。その結果、記憶部13のユニット接続情報DBに記憶されるDU2の接続状態と、相対IDと絶対IDとの関連付けとは、更新される。このように、新DUカウント値と旧DUカウント値とが不一致のとき、制御部16は、相対IDと絶対IDとの関連付けを更新する。両接続方式が異なるとき、制御部16は、記憶部13に記憶されているDU2の接続方式を更新する。 The control unit 16 associates the connection method of DU 2, the number of connected devices, and the relative ID, and stores them in the unit connection information DB of the storage unit 13 (S 19). As a result, the connection state of DU 2 stored in the unit connection information DB of the storage unit 13 and the association between the relative ID and the absolute ID are updated. As described above, when the new DU count value and the old DU count value do not match, the control unit 16 updates the association between the relative ID and the absolute ID. When the two connection methods are different, the control unit 16 updates the connection method of DU 2 stored in the storage unit 13.
 DU情報取得処理(S2)とDU設定処理(S3)の各処理内容は、前述したDU情報取得処理(図17)とDU設定処理(図20)の各処理内容と、同様である。 The processing contents of DU information acquisition processing (S2) and DU setting processing (S3) are the same as the processing contents of DU information acquisition processing (FIG. 17) and DU setting processing (FIG. 20) described above.
 図27は、変更処理後のユニット接続状態DBに記憶されている情報の一例を示す図である。
 同図は、図19と比較して、DU2A3が無くなり、DU2A4の相対IDが「4」から「3」に変更されたことを示す。このように、相対IDに変更が生じたとき、絶対IDと相対IDとの関連付けが更新されるため、DU2の接続状態の変更の前後における音声情報の合成処理の不具合などは生じない。
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of information stored in the unit connection state DB after the change process.
This figure shows that the DU 2 A 3 is eliminated and the relative ID of DU 2 A 4 is changed from “4” to “3” as compared with FIG. As described above, when the relative ID is changed, the association between the absolute ID and the relative ID is updated, so that the problem of the synthesizing process of the audio information before and after the change of the connection state of DU 2 does not occur.
 なお、変更処理は、DU2の接続台数に変更が無いとき、DU2の相対IDを更新せず、DU2の接続方式のみ更新してもよい。 In the change process, when there is no change in the number of connected DU2, the relative ID of DU2 may not be updated, and only the connection method of DU2 may be updated.
●リクエスト処理
 図11に戻る。
 運用処理(S4)において、運用パケットにリクエストフラグが付与された場合、会議システムSは、リクエスト処理(S6)を実行する。リクエスト処理(S6)は、DU2から発話要求があった場合に、音声スロットへのDU2の割り当てまでのコマンド管理を実行する処理である。
Request processing Return to FIG.
In the operation process (S4), when the request flag is attached to the operation packet, the conference system S executes the request process (S6). The request process (S6) is a process of executing command management up to assignment of DU2 to a voice slot when there is a speech request from DU2.
 リクエストフラグは、コマンドそのものではなく、DU2の使用者が発話要求をする際に、使用者の操作により運用パケットに付与される固定長のビットのオン・オフである。リクエストフラグは、DU2の制御部26により運用パケットに付与される。リクエストフラグの付与は、DU2の制御部26がリクエストフラグのビットを処理する(例えば、オンのときはビットを「1」にし、オフのときはビットを「0」にする)ことにより実行される。リクエストフラグを付与したDU2は、CU1からのコマンド待ち状態(リクエスト待ち状態)となる。リクエストフラグが付与された運用パケットは、DU2の通信部21からCU1Aに送信される。使用者の操作は、操作ボタン25aの押下による操作(以下「手動トリガー」という。)と、使用者の声による操作(以下「自動トリガー」という。)と、のいずれかにより実行される。すなわち、手動トリガーと自動トリガーとは、マイクロホン3を「オン」にするためのトリガーである。 The request flag is not a command itself, but is a bit of on / off of a fixed length bit added to the operation packet by the operation of the user when the user of DU 2 makes a speech request. The request flag is added to the operation packet by the control unit 26 of DU2. The addition of the request flag is performed by processing the bit of the request flag (for example, setting the bit to “1” when on, setting the bit to “0” when off) in DU 2 . The DU 2 to which the request flag is assigned is in a state of waiting for a command from the CU 1 (a state of waiting for a request). The operation packet to which the request flag is assigned is transmitted from the communication unit 21 of DU2 to CU1A. The user's operation is performed by either an operation by pressing the operation button 25a (hereinafter referred to as "manual trigger") or an operation by the user's voice (hereinafter referred to as "automatic trigger"). That is, the manual trigger and the automatic trigger are triggers for turning on the microphone 3.
 リクエスト待ち状態のDU2は、通信部21による音声情報のCU1への送信ができない状態(以下「送信不可状態」という。)である。一方、CU1に発話要求(リクエスト)が許可された状態(以下「発話可能状態」という。)のDU2は、通信部21による音声情報のCU1への送信ができる状態(以下「送信可能状態」という。)である。 The request waiting state DU2 is a state in which the communication unit 21 can not transmit voice information to the CU 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “transmission impossible state”). On the other hand, DU2 in a state where a request for speech (request) is permitted to CU1 (hereinafter referred to as "a state where speech is possible") can transmit voice information to CU1 by communication unit 21 (hereinafter referred to as a "possible state for transmission") ).
 図28は、リクエスト処理(S6)におけるCU1Aの情報処理を示すフローチャートである。
 図29は、リクエスト処理(S6)における会議システムSの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。同図は、説明の便宜上、CU1AとDU2A1とのシーケンスのみを示す。
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the information processing of the CU 1A in the request processing (S6).
FIG. 29 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in request processing (S6). This figure shows only the sequence of CU1A and DU2A1 for convenience of explanation.
 CU1Aの制御部16は、CU1Aが受信した運用パケットにリクエストフラグが付与されているとき、リクエストフラグをリクエストフラグレジスタ(記憶部13)に取り込む(S61)。このとき、制御部16は、リクエストフラグの取り込みは行うが、DU2に対してコマンドの送信は行わない。この処理により、リクエストフラグがレジスタ(記憶部13)内に取り込まれるため、発話要求のハードウェア上の受信漏れ(取りこぼし)が無くなる。 When the request flag is attached to the operation packet received by the CU 1A, the control unit 16 of the CU 1A incorporates the request flag into the request flag register (storage unit 13) (S61). At this time, the control unit 16 fetches the request flag but does not send a command to DU2. By this processing, since the request flag is taken into the register (storage unit 13), omission in reception (dropping) of the speech request on the hardware is eliminated.
 次いで、制御部16は、取り込んだリクエストフラグに該当するビットにマスク処理を実行する(S62)。この処理により、リクエストフラグレジスタ内のリクエストフラグが保護、つまり、リクエストフラグが書き替え不可能となる。その結果、リクエストフラグの誤検出が防止される。 Next, the control unit 16 performs mask processing on the bits corresponding to the fetched request flag (S62). By this processing, the request flag in the request flag register is protected, that is, the request flag can not be rewritten. As a result, false detection of the request flag is prevented.
 次いで、制御部16は、例えば、議長やシステム管理者などからのリクエストの拒否の有無を確認する(S63)。リクエストが拒否された場合(S63の「はい」)、制御部16は、マスクを解除する(S71)。 Next, the control unit 16 confirms, for example, whether or not the request from the chairperson or the system administrator is rejected (S63). If the request is rejected ("Yes" in S63), the control unit 16 releases the mask (S71).
 リクエストが拒否されない場合(S63の「いいえ」)、制御部16は、音声スロットと音声領域との空きの有無を確認する(S64)。音声スロットと音声領域とに空きがある場合(S64の「はい」)、制御部16は、リクエストの内容を取得する取得コマンドを通信部11に送信する。通信部11は、取得コマンドを乗せた内容取得パケットをDU2A1に送信する(S65)。 If the request is not rejected ("No" in S63), the control unit 16 confirms the presence or absence of a space between the voice slot and the voice area (S64). When there is a space between the voice slot and the voice area (“YES” in S64), the control unit 16 transmits an acquisition command for acquiring the content of the request to the communication unit 11. The communication unit 11 transmits the content acquisition packet carrying the acquisition command to DU 2 A 1 (S 65).
 内容取得パケットを受信したDU2A1の通信部21は、リクエストの内容(発話要求)を内容取得パケットに乗せてCU1Aに送信する(S67)。DU2A1は、リクエストの内容をCU1Aに送信すると共に、リクエストフラグをクリアする(リクエストフラグ用のビットをオフにする)(S66)。 The communication unit 21 of DU 2 A 1 having received the content acquisition packet places the content of the request (utterance request) on the content acquisition packet and transmits it to the CU 1 A (S 67). The DU 2 A 1 transmits the contents of the request to the CU 1 A and clears the request flag (turns off the bit for the request flag) (S 66).
 なお、リクエストフラグのクリアはDU2ではなく、CU1が行ってもよい。 The request flag may be cleared not by DU2 but by CU1.
 通信部11は、内容取得パケットを受信して(S68)、リクエストの内容を制御部16に送信する。制御部16は、リクエストの内容を取得後にマスクを解除して(S69)、DU2A1に音声スロットと音声領域とを割り当てる(S70)。その後、DU2A1からの発話要求は、許可される。DU2A1の制御部26は、通信部21の状態を送信不可状態から送信可能状態に切換える。すなわち、DU2A1は、発話可能状態となる。 The communication unit 11 receives the content acquisition packet (S68), and transmits the content of the request to the control unit 16. After acquiring the content of the request, the control unit 16 cancels the mask (S69), and allocates an audio slot and an audio area to DU2A1 (S70). Thereafter, the speech request from DU 2 A 1 is permitted. The control unit 26 of the DU 2 A 1 switches the state of the communication unit 21 from the transmission disabled state to the transmission enabled state. That is, DU 2 A 1 is in the speech enable state.
 一方、制御部16は、音声スロットと音声領域とに空きがない場合(S64の「いいえ」)、音声スロットと音声領域とが空くのを待つ(DU2A1に対して何ら処理を行わない)。このとき、DU2A1は、自動的にリクエスト待ち状態となる。DU2A1の通信部21の状態は、送信不可状態である。 On the other hand, when there is no space between the voice slot and the voice area ("No" in S64), the control unit 16 waits for the voice slot and the voice area to be free (does not perform any processing on DU2A1). At this time, DU 2 A 1 automatically enters a request waiting state. The state of the communication unit 21 of DU 2 A 1 is the transmission disabled state.
 会議システムSは、音声スロットと音声領域とにDU2を割り当てた場合(S70)と、マスクを解除した場合(S71)と、のいずれかの処理の後、運用処理(S4)に戻る。 The conference system S returns to the operation process (S4) after one of the processes of allocating the DU2 to the audio slot and the audio area (S70) and releasing the mask (S71).
 このように、会議システムSは、DU2からの発話要求を定期的なリクエストフラグの処理により取り込み、音声スロットと音声領域とが空いているときにのみCU1に内容取得コマンドをDU2に送信させる。すなわち、会議システムSは、発話要求のたびにコマンドを送信しない。そのため、会議システムSは、一度に複数のDU2から発話要求があっても情報処理の負荷が過剰とならない。 As described above, the conference system S takes in the speech request from DU 2 by processing of the request flag periodically, and makes CU 1 transmit the content acquisition command to DU 2 only when the audio slot and the audio area are free. That is, the conference system S does not transmit a command each time a speech request is made. Therefore, the conference system S does not impose an excessive load of information processing even if a plurality of DUs 2 request speech at a time.
 また、音声スロットと音声領域とに空きがないとき、発話要求をしたDU2は自動的にリクエスト待ち状態になる。そのため、会議システムSは、DU2からの全ての発話要求に応じる必要がなく、情報処理の負荷が軽減される。 Also, when there is no space in the voice slot and voice area, DU 2 which has made a speech request automatically enters a request waiting state. Therefore, the conference system S does not have to respond to all the speech requests from DU 2 and the load of information processing is reduced.
 さらに、DU2からの発話要求は、コマンドではなく、リクエストフラグのビットの処理により行われる。そのため、パケットにおけるリクエストフラグの占める領域を、例えば、数バイトとすることが可能となる。その結果、発話要求に対する会議システムSの情報処理の負荷は軽減される。 Furthermore, the speech request from DU 2 is made by processing the bits of the request flag, not the command. Therefore, the area occupied by the request flag in the packet can be, for example, several bytes. As a result, the load on the information processing of the conference system S in response to the speech request is reduced.
 なお、本発明におけるリクエスト処理の流れは、本実施の形態に限定されない。すなわち、例えば、音声スロットと音声領域との空きの確認(S64)は、内容取得パケットの送受信後に実行してもよい。 The flow of request processing in the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment. That is, for example, the confirmation of the space between the voice slot and the voice area (S64) may be performed after transmission and reception of the content acquisition packet.
 図30は、リクエスト処理におけるCU1Aの別の情報処理を示すフローチャートである。
 同図に示すリクエスト処理(S6a)は、音声スロットと音声領域との空きの確認(S64a)が音声スロットと音声領域との割り当て(S70)の直前に実行される点を除き、図28に示すリクエスト処理と同じである。すなわち、同図に示すリクエスト処理(S6a)において、リクエストフラグの取り込み処理(S61)、マスク処理(S62)、リクエストの拒否の有無の確認処理(S63)、リクエストが拒否された場合(S63の「はい」)の処理(S71)、音声スロットと音声領域との割り当て処理(S70)は、図28に示すリクエスト処理(S6)と同じである。
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing another information processing of CU 1 A in request processing.
The request process (S6a) shown in the figure is shown in FIG. 28 except that the confirmation (S64a) of the space between the voice slot and the voice area is executed immediately before the assignment (S70) of the voice slot and the voice area. Same as request processing. That is, in the request process (S6a) shown in the figure, the process of fetching the request flag (S61), the mask process (S62), the process of confirming the rejection of the request (S63), and the request is rejected (S63). The process of “Yes” (S71) and the process of assigning the voice slot to the voice area (S70) are the same as the request process (S6) shown in FIG.
 リクエストが拒否されない場合(S63の「いいえ」)、制御部16は、取得コマンドを通信部11に送信する。通信部11は、取得コマンドを乗せた内容取得パケットをDU2A1に送信する(S65a)。 When the request is not rejected (“No” in S63), the control unit 16 transmits an acquisition command to the communication unit 11. The communication unit 11 transmits the content acquisition packet carrying the acquisition command to DU 2 A 1 (S 65 a).
 内容取得パケットを受信したDU2A1は、リクエストフラグをクリアして(S66)、リクエストの内容(発話要求)を内容取得パケットに乗せてCU1Aに送信する(S67)。 Upon receiving the content acquisition packet, the DU 2 A 1 clears the request flag (S 66), places the content of the request (utterance request) in the content acquisition packet, and transmits it to the CU 1 A (S 67).
 通信部11は、内容取得パケットを受信して(S68a)、リクエストの内容を制御部16に送信する。制御部16は、リクエストの内容を取得後にマスクを解除して(S69a)、音声スロットと音声領域との空きを確認する(S64a)。音声スロットと音声領域とに空きがある場合(S64aの「はい」)、制御部16は、音声スロットと音声領域とにDU2A1を割り当てる(S70)。このとき、DU2A1は、発話可能状態となる。一方、音音声スロットと声領域とに空きがない場合(S64aの「いいえ」)、制御部16は、音声スロットと音声領域とが空くのを待つ。 The communication unit 11 receives the content acquisition packet (S 68 a), and transmits the content of the request to the control unit 16. After acquiring the content of the request, the control unit 16 cancels the mask (S69a), and confirms the free space between the audio slot and the audio area (S64a). If there is a space between the voice slot and the voice area ("Yes" in S64a), the control unit 16 assigns DU2A1 to the voice slot and the voice area (S70). At this time, DU 2 A 1 is in the speech enable state. On the other hand, when there is no space between the audio / speech slot and the voice area ("No" in S64a), the control unit 16 waits for the audio slot and the audio area to be free.
 なお、本発明にかかる会議システムの各処理の流れは、本実施の形態に限定されない。すなわち、例えば、会議システムSは、各処理をシリーズ処理ではなく、適切なパラレル処理で実行してもよい。 The flow of each process of the conference system according to the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment. That is, for example, the conference system S may execute each processing by appropriate parallel processing instead of series processing.
 また、前述のとおり、CU1からDU2に送信される各種パケットは、カウンタフラグとリクエストフラグとを含む。すなわち、カウンタフラグのインクリメントによるDU2の接続状態の監視は、CU1からDU2に送信される各種パケットにおいて、コマンドの有無に関わらず常に行われる。また、リクエストフラグは、CU1からDU2に送信される各種パケットにおいて、常に付与可能である。 Also, as described above, the various packets transmitted from CU1 to DU2 include a counter flag and a request flag. That is, monitoring of the connection state of DU 2 by incrementing the counter flag is always performed in various packets transmitted from CU 1 to DU 2 regardless of the presence or absence of a command. In addition, the request flag can always be assigned in various packets transmitted from CU1 to DU2.
●リクエスト処理におけるDU2の発光部の動作
 DU2の発光部28の発光状態は、リクエスト処理(S6)の間のDU2の動作状態に応じて変化する。すなわち、例えば、発光部28の発光パターンは、DU2がリクエスト待ち状態(送信不可状態)のときに点滅パターンとなり、DU2が発話可能状態(送信可能状態)のときに点灯パターンとなる。また、DU2のリクエストが拒否されたとき、発光部28の第1発光部28aのみがリクエスト待ち状態の点滅パターンよりも短い間隔で点滅し、使用者のみにリクエストが拒否されたことを報知する。リクエストフラグを付与していないDU2の発光部28の発光パターンは、消灯パターンやディマー点灯パターンを示す。このように、発光部28は、DU2の動作状況を視覚的に報知する報知部として機能する。
Operation of Light Emitting Unit of DU 2 in Request Processing The light emission state of the light emitting unit 28 of DU 2 changes in accordance with the operation state of DU 2 during request processing (S 6). That is, for example, the light emission pattern of the light emitting unit 28 is a blinking pattern when DU2 is in a request waiting state (transmission disabled state), and is a lighting pattern when DU2 is in an utterance enabled state (transmission enabled state). In addition, when the request for DU2 is rejected, only the first light emitting unit 28a of the light emitting unit 28 blinks at a shorter interval than the blinking pattern in the request waiting state, and notifies only the user that the request is rejected. The light emission pattern of the light emitting unit 28 of DU2 to which the request flag is not assigned indicates a light off pattern or a dimmer lighting pattern. As described above, the light emitting unit 28 functions as a notifying unit that visually notifies the operating condition of DU2.
●複数のCUを備える会議システムの動作●
 次に、複数のCU1を備える会議システムの動作について説明する。
● Operation of the conferencing system with multiple CUs ●
Next, the operation of the conference system including the plurality of CUs 1 will be described.
 図31は、複数のCU1を備える会議システムSの情報処理を示すフローチャートである。
 会議システムSは、会議システムSの起動後に、初期化処理(S1)と、CU接続状態確認処理(S101)と、DU情報取得処理(S2)と、スレーブCU情報取得処理(S102)と、スレーブDU初期化処理(S103)と、スレーブDU情報取得処理(S104)と、スレーブCUのDB情報取得処理(S105)と、DU設定処理(S3)と、スレーブDU設定処理(S106)と、プライオリティ再設定処理(S107)と、運用処理(S4)と、を実行する。スレーブCUは、スレーブとして設定されたCU1である。スレーブDUは、スレーブとして設定されたCU1に接続されたDU2である。
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing information processing of the conference system S including a plurality of CUs.
After the conference system S is activated, the conference system S performs an initialization process (S1), a CU connection status confirmation process (S101), a DU information acquisition process (S2), a slave CU information acquisition process (S102), and a slave DU initialization process (S103), slave DU information acquisition process (S104), DB information acquisition process of slave CU (S105), DU setting process (S3), slave DU setting process (S106), priority re-execution The setting process (S107) and the operation process (S4) are executed. The slave CU is CU1 set as a slave. The slave DU is DU2 connected to CU1 set as a slave.
 なお、本発明にかかる会議システムの各処理の流れは、本実施の形態に限定されない。すなわち、例えば、会議システムSは、各処理をシリーズ処理ではなく、適切なパラレル処理で実行してもよい。 The flow of each process of the conference system according to the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment. That is, for example, the conference system S may execute each processing by appropriate parallel processing instead of series processing.
 以下、図1のCU1A(以下「マスターCU」という。)と、マスターCUに接続されたDU2A1-2A4(以下「マスターDU」という。)と、マスターCUに接続されたCU1B(以下「スレーブCU」という。)と、スレーブCUに接続されたDU2B1-2B4(以下「スレーブDU」という。)と、を例に説明する。 Hereinafter, CU1A of FIG. 1 (hereinafter referred to as “master CU”), DU2A1-2A4 connected to the master CU (hereinafter referred to as “master DU), and CU1B connected to the master CU (hereinafter referred to as“ slave CU ”) And a DU 2 B 1-2 B 4 (hereinafter referred to as “slave DU”) connected to the slave CU will be described as an example.
 マスターDUは、マスターCUの第1端子と第2端子とに通信回線を介してリング接続される。スレーブDUは、スレーブCUの第1端子と第2端子とに通信回線を介してリング接続される。スレーブCUはマスターCUの第3端子に接続される。 The master DU is ring-connected to the first terminal and the second terminal of the master CU via a communication line. The slave DU is ring-connected to the first terminal and the second terminal of the slave CU via a communication line. The slave CU is connected to the third terminal of the master CU.
 マスターCU(CU1A)は、例えば、システム管理者などが後述するCUユニット情報を変更することによりマスターとして設定される。スレーブCU(CU1B)は、例えば、システム管理者などが後述するCUユニット情報を変更することによりスレーブとして設定される。複数のCUを備える会議システムSの制御は、マスターCUにより行われる。 The master CU (CU1A) is set as a master, for example, by changing CU unit information described later by a system administrator or the like. The slave CU (CU1B) is set as a slave, for example, by changing CU unit information described later by a system administrator or the like. Control of the conferencing system S comprising a plurality of CUs is performed by the master CU.
●初期化処理
 先ず、会議システムSは、マスターCUに接続されたマスターDUの初期化処理(S1)を実行する。初期化処理(S1)は、前述した初期化処理(図12)と同じである。
Initialization Process First, the conference system S executes an initialization process (S1) of the master DU connected to the master CU. The initialization process (S1) is the same as the initialization process (FIG. 12) described above.
●CU接続状態確認処理
 次いで、会議システムSは、CU接続状態確認処理(S101)を実行する。CU接続状態確認処理(S101)は、CU1に接続されている別のCU1の接続方式と接続台数とを認識する処理である。CU接続状態確認処理(S101)は、会議システムSの動作中、繰り返し実行される。
CU Connection State Confirmation Process Next, the conference system S executes a CU connection state confirmation process (S101). The CU connection state confirmation process (S101) is a process of recognizing the connection method of another CU1 connected to CU1 and the number of connected CUs. CU connection state confirmation processing (S101) is repeatedly performed during operation of the conference system S.
 図32は、CU接続状態確認処理における会議システムSの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。 FIG. 32 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in the CU connection state confirmation processing.
 マスターCUの制御部16は、CUの接続状態を確認するCU接続状態確認コマンドをマスターCUの通信部11に送信する。マスターCUの通信部11は、CU接続状態確認コマンドを乗せたCU接続状態確認パケットを第3端子からスレーブCUに送信する(S1011)。マスターCUの制御部16は、スレーブCUに対して送信するパケットに含まれるカウンタフラグのカウント値をリセットする。すなわち、CU1AからCU1Bに送信されるパケットに含まれるカウンタフラグのカウント値は、「0」である。CU1AからCU1Bに送信されるパケットに含まれるカウンタフラグは、マスターCUに接続されたスレーブCUの数のカウントに用いられる。 The control unit 16 of the master CU transmits a CU connection state confirmation command for confirming the connection state of the CU to the communication unit 11 of the master CU. The communication unit 11 of the master CU transmits a CU connection state confirmation packet carrying a CU connection state confirmation command from the third terminal to the slave CU (S1011). The control unit 16 of the master CU resets the count value of the counter flag included in the packet transmitted to the slave CU. That is, the count value of the counter flag included in the packet transmitted from CU1A to CU1B is “0”. The counter flag included in the packet transmitted from CU1A to CU1B is used to count the number of slave CUs connected to the master CU.
 CU接続状態確認パケットを受信したスレーブCUの制御部16は、カウンタフラグのカウント値をインクリメントする(S1012)。スレーブCUの通信部11は、インクリメントされたカウンタフラグを含むCU接続状態確認パケットをマスターCUに送信する。 The control unit 16 of the slave CU that has received the CU connection status confirmation packet increments the count value of the counter flag (S1012). The communication unit 11 of the slave CU transmits a CU connection state confirmation packet including the incremented counter flag to the master CU.
 マスターCUの通信部11は、第3端子を介してスレーブCUからCU接続状態確認パケットを受信する(S1013)。 The communication unit 11 of the master CU receives the CU connection status confirmation packet from the slave CU via the third terminal (S1013).
 マスターCUの制御部16は、マスターCUの通信部11が受信したCU接続状態確認パケットに含まれるカウンタフラグのカウント値などの情報を、マスターCUの記憶部13に記憶する。 The control unit 16 of the master CU stores information such as the count value of the counter flag included in the CU connection state confirmation packet received by the communication unit 11 of the master CU in the storage unit 13 of the master CU.
 マスターCUの制御部16は、前述したDU2の接続状態の認識(S17)と同様に、CU1の接続状態を認識する(S1014)。すなわち、例えば、マスターCUの制御部16は、カウンタフラグのカウント値に基づいて、1台のスレーブCUがデイジー接続されていることを認識する。 The control unit 16 of the master CU recognizes the connection state of the CU1 (S1014) as in the case of the recognition (S17) of the connection state of the DU2 described above. That is, for example, the control unit 16 of the master CU recognizes that one slave CU is connected in a daisy based on the count value of the counter flag.
 マスターCUの制御部16は、CU1の接続状態を認識したとき、各CU1の相対IDを生成する(S1015)。 When recognizing the connection state of CU1, the control unit 16 of the master CU generates a relative ID of each CU1 (S1015).
 マスターCUの制御部16は、CU1の接続方式と接続台数と相対IDとをマスターCUの記憶部13のユニット接続情報DBに記憶する(S1016)。 The control unit 16 of the master CU stores the connection method of the CU 1, the number of connected units, and the relative ID in the unit connection information DB of the storage unit 13 of the master CU (S 1016).
 CU接続状態確認処理(S101)は、会議システムSの動作中、定期的に繰り返し実行される。すなわち、CU接続状態確認パケットは、マスターCUとスレーブCUとの間で定期的に繰り返し送受信される。マスターCUの制御部16は、スレーブCUから接続状態確認パケットを受信するごとに、新たに取得したカウンタフラグのカウント値(以下「新CUカウント値」という。)と、マスターCUの記憶部13に記憶されているカウント値(以下「旧CUカウント値」という。)と、を比較する。新CUカウント値と旧CUカウント値とが一致するとき、マスターCUの制御部16は、CU1の接続状態に変更が無いと判定する。一方、新CUカウント値と旧CUカウント値とが一致しないとき(不一致のとき)、マスターCUの制御部16は、CU1の接続状態に変更が有ると判定する。マスターCUの制御部16は、新CUカウント値をマスターCUの記憶部13に記憶する。すなわち、マスターCUの制御部16は、新CUカウント値で旧CUカウント値を更新する。 The CU connection state confirmation process (S101) is periodically and repeatedly executed while the conference system S is in operation. That is, the CU connection status confirmation packet is periodically repeatedly transmitted and received between the master CU and the slave CU. Every time the control unit 16 of the master CU receives a connection status confirmation packet from the slave CU, the control unit 16 of the counter flag newly acquired (hereinafter referred to as “new CU count value”) is stored in the storage unit 13 of the master CU. The stored count value (hereinafter referred to as "old CU count value") is compared. When the new CU count value matches the old CU count value, the control unit 16 of the master CU determines that there is no change in the connection state of CU1. On the other hand, when the new CU count value and the old CU count value do not match (when they do not match), the control unit 16 of the master CU determines that there is a change in the connection state of CU1. The control unit 16 of the master CU stores the new CU count value in the storage unit 13 of the master CU. That is, the control unit 16 of the master CU updates the old CU count value with the new CU count value.
 スレーブCUに接続異常が発生したときや、新たなスレーブCUが接続されたときのように、スレーブCUの接続状態が変わったとき、新CUカウント値と旧CUカウント値との比較結果は、不一致となる。比較結果が不一致のとき、マスターCUの制御部16は、新たに認識したスレーブCUの接続状態で、記憶部13に記憶されているユニット接続情報DBに記憶されている情報を更新する。そのため、マスターCUは、スレーブCUに接続異常が発生した場合に、即座に接続異常の発生を認識すると共に、接続異常箇所を特定する。また、スレーブCUの接続状態の変更が発生したときに、マスターCUがユニット接続情報DBに記憶されている情報を更新することで、接続状態の変更の前後での音声情報の合成処理などの不具合は生じない。 When the connection status of the slave CU changes, such as when a connection error occurs in the slave CU or when a new slave CU is connected, the comparison result between the new CU count value and the old CU count value does not match It becomes. When the comparison results do not match, the control unit 16 of the master CU updates the information stored in the unit connection information DB stored in the storage unit 13 in the connection state of the newly recognized slave CU. Therefore, when a connection abnormality occurs in the slave CU, the master CU immediately recognizes the occurrence of the connection abnormality and identifies the connection abnormality point. Also, when a change in the connection state of the slave CU occurs, the master CU updates the information stored in the unit connection information DB, thereby causing problems such as voice information synthesis processing before and after the change in the connection state. Does not occur.
●DU情報取得処理
 次いで、会議システムSは、マスターDUのDU情報取得処理(S2)を実行する。DU情報取得処理(S2)は、前述したDU情報取得処理(図17)と同じである。
DU Information Acquisition Process Next, the conference system S executes DU information acquisition process (S2) of the master DU. The DU information acquisition process (S2) is the same as the DU information acquisition process (FIG. 17) described above.
●スレーブCU情報取得処理
 次いで、会議システムSは、スレーブCU情報取得処理(S102)を実行する。スレーブCU情報取得処理は、スレーブCUのCUユニット情報を取得する処理である。CUユニット情報は、CU1のシリアルナンバー(絶対ID)やMACアドレスなどである。
Next, the conference system S executes a slave CU information acquisition process (S102). The slave CU information acquisition process is a process of acquiring CU unit information of the slave CU. The CU unit information is, for example, a serial number (absolute ID) or a MAC address of CU1.
 図33は、スレーブCU情報取得処理(S102)における会議システムSの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。 FIG. 33 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in the slave CU information acquisition process (S102).
 マスターCUの制御部16は、スレーブCUのCUユニット情報を取得する情報取得コマンドをマスターCUの通信部11に送信する。マスターCUの通信部11は、情報取得コマンドを乗せた情報取得パケットをスレーブCUに送信する(S1021)。 The control unit 16 of the master CU transmits an information acquisition command for acquiring CU unit information of the slave CU to the communication unit 11 of the master CU. The communication unit 11 of the master CU transmits an information acquisition packet carrying an information acquisition command to the slave CU (S1021).
 情報取得コマンドを受信したスレーブCUは、情報取得コマンドに従い、CUユニット情報を情報取得パケットに乗せてマスターCUに送信する(S1022)。 The slave CU that has received the information acquisition command carries the CU unit information on the information acquisition packet in accordance with the information acquisition command and transmits it to the master CU (S1022).
 マスターCUの通信部11は、スレーブCUからの情報取得パケットを受信する(S1023)。マスターCUの通信部11は、CUユニット情報をマスターCUの制御部16に送信する。 The communication unit 11 of the master CU receives an information acquisition packet from the slave CU (S1023). The communication unit 11 of the master CU transmits CU unit information to the control unit 16 of the master CU.
 制御部16は、CUユニット情報からスレーブCUの絶対IDを取得する(S1024)。制御部16は、ユニット接続情報DBを読み出して、絶対IDと相対IDとを関連付けてユニット接続情報DBに記憶する(S1025)。 The control unit 16 acquires the absolute ID of the slave CU from the CU unit information (S1024). The control unit 16 reads out the unit connection information DB, associates the absolute ID and the relative ID, and stores them in the unit connection information DB (S1025).
●スレーブDU初期化処理
 次いで、会議システムSは、スレーブDU初期化処理(S103)を実行する。スレーブDU初期化処理(S103)は、スレーブCUに接続されたスレーブDUのユニット設定を初期化すると共に、スレーブDUの接続状態を認識する処理である。
Slave DU Initialization Process Next, the conference system S executes a slave DU initialization process (S103). The slave DU initialization process (S103) is a process of initializing the unit setting of the slave DU connected to the slave CU and recognizing the connection state of the slave DU.
 図34は、スレーブDU初期化処理(S103)における会議システムSの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。 FIG. 34 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in the slave DU initialization process (S103).
 マスターCUの制御部16は、スレーブDUの初期化を行う初期化コマンドをマスターCUの通信部11に送信する。マスターCUの通信部11は、初期化コマンドを乗せた初期化パケットを、第3端子からスレーブCUに送信する(S1031a)。 The control unit 16 of the master CU transmits an initialization command for initializing the slave DU to the communication unit 11 of the master CU. The communication unit 11 of the master CU transmits the initialization packet carrying the initialization command from the third terminal to the slave CU (S1031a).
 初期化パケットを受信したスレーブCUは、初期化パケットを第1端子と第2端子との双方向からスレーブDUに送信する(S1031b)。スレーブDUは、初期化コマンドに従いユニット設定を初期化すると共に、カウンタフラグのカウント値をインクリメントする(S1032)。スレーブDUは、カウンタフラグのカウント値をインクリメントした初期化パケットをスレーブCUに送信する。初期化パケットは、初期化処理(図12)と同様にスレーブDU間を伝送される。 The slave CU that has received the initialization packet transmits the initialization packet from both directions of the first terminal and the second terminal to the slave DU (S1031b). The slave DU initializes the unit setting in accordance with the initialization command, and increments the count value of the counter flag (S1032). The slave DU transmits an initialization packet in which the count value of the counter flag is incremented to the slave CU. The initialization packet is transmitted between slave DUs in the same manner as the initialization process (FIG. 12).
 スレーブCUの通信部11は、第1端子と第2端子とを介して、スレーブDUから初期化パケットを受信する(S1033b)。スレーブCUの制御部16は、スレーブCUの通信部11が受信した初期化パケットに含まれるカウンタフラグのカウント値などの情報をスレーブCUの記憶部13に記憶する。 The communication unit 11 of the slave CU receives the initialization packet from the slave DU via the first terminal and the second terminal (S1033b). The control unit 16 of the slave CU stores information such as the count value of the counter flag included in the initialization packet received by the communication unit 11 of the slave CU in the storage unit 13 of the slave CU.
 スレーブCUの制御部16は、スレーブDUの接続状態を認識して(S1035b)、スレーブDUの相対IDを生成する(S1036b)。この相対IDは、スレーブCUがスレーブDUの制御に用いるIDである。 The control unit 16 of the slave CU recognizes the connection state of the slave DU (S1035b), and generates a relative ID of the slave DU (S1036b). The relative ID is an ID that the slave CU uses to control the slave DU.
 スレーブCUの制御部16は、スレーブDUの接続方式と接続台数と相対IDとを関連付けてスレーブCUの記憶部13のユニット接続情報DBに記憶する(S1037b)。 The control unit 16 of the slave CU associates the connection method of the slave DU, the number of connected devices, and the relative ID, and stores them in the unit connection information DB of the storage unit 13 of the slave CU (S1037b).
 スレーブCUの通信部11は、受信した初期化パケットをマスターCUに送信する(S1034b)。 The communication unit 11 of the slave CU transmits the received initialization packet to the master CU (S1034b).
 マスターCUの通信部11は、第3端子を介して、スレーブCUから初期化パケットを受信する(S1033a)。マスターCUの通信部11は、受信した初期化パケットから得たカウンタフラグのカウント値などの情報をマスターCUの制御部16に送信する。マスターCUの制御部16は、カウンタフラグのカウント値などの情報をマスターCUの記憶部13に記憶する。 The communication unit 11 of the master CU receives the initialization packet from the slave CU via the third terminal (S1033a). The communication unit 11 of the master CU transmits information such as the count value of the counter flag obtained from the received initialization packet to the control unit 16 of the master CU. The control unit 16 of the master CU stores information such as the count value of the counter flag in the storage unit 13 of the master CU.
 マスターCUの制御部16は、スレーブDUの接続状態を認識して(S1035a)、スレーブDUの相対IDを生成する(S1036a)。この相対IDは、マスターCUがスレーブDUの制御に用いるIDである。 The control unit 16 of the master CU recognizes the connection state of the slave DU (S1035a), and generates a relative ID of the slave DU (S1036a). This relative ID is an ID that the master CU uses to control the slave DU.
 マスターCUの制御部16は、スレーブDUの接続方式と接続台数と相対IDとを関連付けてマスターCUの記憶部13のユニット接続情報DBに記憶する(S1037a)。 The control unit 16 of the master CU associates the connection method of the slave DU, the number of connected devices, and the relative ID, and stores them in the unit connection information DB of the storage unit 13 of the master CU (S1037a).
●スレーブDU情報取得処理
 次いで、会議システムSは、スレーブDU情報取得処理(S104)を実行する。スレーブDU情報取得処理(S104)は、スレーブCUに接続されたスレーブDUのユニット情報を取得する処理である。
Slave DU Information Acquisition Process Next, the conference system S executes a slave DU information acquisition process (S104). The slave DU information acquisition process (S104) is a process of acquiring unit information of the slave DU connected to the slave CU.
 図35は、スレーブDU情報取得処理(S104)における会議システムSの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。 FIG. 35 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in the slave DU information acquisition processing (S104).
 マスターCUの制御部16は、スレーブDUのユニット情報を取得する情報取得コマンドをマスターCUの通信部11に送信する。マスターCUの通信部11は、情報取得コマンドを乗せた情報取得パケットを、第3端子を介してスレーブCUに送信する(S1041a)。 The control unit 16 of the master CU transmits an information acquisition command for acquiring unit information of the slave DU to the communication unit 11 of the master CU. The communication unit 11 of the master CU transmits an information acquisition packet carrying an information acquisition command to the slave CU via the third terminal (S1041a).
 情報取得パケットを受信したスレーブCUは、情報取得パケットを第1端子と第2端子との双方向からスレーブDUに送信する(S1041b)。スレーブDUは、情報取得コマンドに従いユニット情報を情報取得パケットに乗せてスレーブCUに送信する(S1042)。情報取得パケットは、DU情報取得処理(図17)と同様にスレーブDU間を伝送される。 The slave CU that has received the information acquisition packet transmits the information acquisition packet to the slave DU from both directions of the first terminal and the second terminal (S1041b). The slave DU puts unit information in the information acquisition packet in accordance with the information acquisition command and transmits the unit information to the slave CU (S1042). The information acquisition packet is transmitted between slave DUs as in the DU information acquisition process (FIG. 17).
 スレーブCUの通信部11は、スレーブDUからの情報取得パケットを受信する(S1043b)。 The communication unit 11 of the slave CU receives an information acquisition packet from the slave DU (S1043b).
 スレーブCUの制御部16は、スレーブCUの通信部11が受信した情報取得パケットに含まれるユニット情報からスレーブDUの絶対IDを取得する(S1045b)。制御部16は、絶対IDと相対IDとを関連付けてスレーブCUの記憶部13のユニット接続情報DBに記憶する(S1046b)。すなわち、スレーブCUの制御部16は、スレーブCUにおける相対IDと絶対IDとの関連付けを更新うる。そのため、マスターCUとスレーブCUとの接続状態に変更が生じても、スレーブCUは、スタンドアローンで動作可能である。その結果、スレーブCUの接続状態の変更の前後において、音声情報の合成処理などの情報の不具合は生じない。 The control unit 16 of the slave CU acquires the absolute ID of the slave DU from the unit information included in the information acquisition packet received by the communication unit 11 of the slave CU (S1045b). The control unit 16 associates the absolute ID and the relative ID, and stores them in the unit connection information DB of the storage unit 13 of the slave CU (S1046b). That is, the control unit 16 of the slave CU can update the association between the relative ID and the absolute ID in the slave CU. Therefore, even if the connection state between the master CU and the slave CU is changed, the slave CU can operate in a stand-alone manner. As a result, before and after the change of the connection state of the slave CU, no problem of the information such as the synthesizing process of the voice information occurs.
 スレーブCUの通信部11は、情報取得パケットをマスターCUに送信する(S1044b)。 The communication unit 11 of the slave CU transmits an information acquisition packet to the master CU (S1044b).
 マスターCUの通信部11は、第3端子を介して、スレーブCUから情報取得パケットを受信する(S1043a)。 The communication unit 11 of the master CU receives the information acquisition packet from the slave CU via the third terminal (S1043a).
 マスターCUの制御部16は、マスターCUの通信部11が受信した情報取得パケットに含まれるユニット情報から絶対IDを取得する(S1045a)。マスターCUの制御部16は、絶対IDと相対IDとを関連付けてマスターCUの記憶部13のユニット接続情報DBに記憶する(S1046a)。 The control unit 16 of the master CU acquires an absolute ID from unit information included in the information acquisition packet received by the communication unit 11 of the master CU (S1045a). The control unit 16 of the master CU associates the absolute ID and the relative ID and stores them in the unit connection information DB of the storage unit 13 of the master CU (S1046a).
 図36は、スレーブDU情報取得処理後のマスターCUの記憶部13に記憶される情報の例を示す図である。同図は、スレーブCU(ID「2」)の端子番号「1」「2」にリング接続された4台のDU2の相対ID「5」「6」「7」「8」がそれぞれ絶対ID「E」「F」「G」「H」と関連付けられていることを示す。同図は、端子番号「3」にデイジー接続された1台のCU1の相対ID「1」が絶対ID「β」と関連付けられていることを示す。 FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of information stored in the storage unit 13 of the master CU after slave DU information acquisition processing. In the figure, the relative IDs "5" "6" "7" "8" of the four DU2 ring-connected to the terminal numbers "1" "2" of the slave CU (ID "2") are absolute IDs " E indicates that it is associated with "F", "G", and "H". The figure shows that the relative ID "1" of one CU 1 daisy-connected to the terminal number "3" is associated with the absolute ID "β".
●スレーブCUのDB情報取得処理
 次いで、会議システムSは、スレーブCUのDB情報取得処理(S105)を実行する。スレーブCUのDB情報取得処理(S105)は、マスターCUが、スレーブCUの保有するユニット設定情報DBに記憶されたスレーブDUのユニット設定情報を取得する処理である。
Next, the conference system S executes DB information acquisition processing (S105) of the slave CU. The DB information acquisition process (S105) of the slave CU is a process in which the master CU acquires unit setting information of the slave DU stored in the unit setting information DB held by the slave CU.
 図37は、スレーブCUのDB情報取得処理(S105)における会議システムSの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。 FIG. 37 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in the DB information acquisition processing (S105) of the slave CU.
 マスターCUの制御部16は、スレーブCUのユニット設定情報を取得するDB情報取得コマンドをマスターCUの通信部11に送信する。マスターCUの通信部11は、DB情報取得コマンドを乗せたDB情報取得パケットを、第3端子を介してスレーブCUに送信する(S1051)。 The control unit 16 of the master CU transmits a DB information acquisition command for acquiring unit setting information of the slave CU to the communication unit 11 of the master CU. The communication unit 11 of the master CU transmits a DB information acquisition packet carrying a DB information acquisition command to the slave CU via the third terminal (S1051).
 スレーブCUの制御部16は、スレーブCUの記憶部13からユニット設定情報DBを読み出して、マスターCUに指定されたスレーブDUのユニット設定情報をスレーブCUの通信部11に送信する。スレーブCUの通信部11は、スレーブDUのユニット設定情報を乗せたDB情報取得パケットをマスターCUに送信する(S1052)。 The control unit 16 of the slave CU reads the unit setting information DB from the storage unit 13 of the slave CU, and transmits the unit setting information of the slave DU designated by the master CU to the communication unit 11 of the slave CU. The communication unit 11 of the slave CU transmits a DB information acquisition packet carrying the unit setting information of the slave DU to the master CU (S1052).
 マスターCUの通信部11は、第3端子を介して、スレーブCUからDB情報取得パケットを受信する(S1053)。マスターCUの通信部11は、受信したDB情報取得パケットから得たスレーブDUのユニット設定情報をマスターCUの制御部16に送信する。 The communication unit 11 of the master CU receives the DB information acquisition packet from the slave CU via the third terminal (S1053). The communication unit 11 of the master CU transmits the unit setting information of the slave DU obtained from the received DB information acquisition packet to the control unit 16 of the master CU.
 マスターCUの制御部16は、マスターCUの通信部11が受信したDB情報取得パケットに含まれるスレーブDUのユニット設定情報を、マスターCUの記憶部13のユニット設定情報DBに記憶する(S1054)。この処理により、マスターCUは、スレーブCUの保有するスレーブDUのユニット設定情報を特定することができる。 The control unit 16 of the master CU stores the unit setting information of the slave DU included in the DB information acquisition packet received by the communication unit 11 of the master CU in the unit setting information DB of the storage unit 13 of the master CU (S1054). By this processing, the master CU can specify the unit setting information of the slave DU held by the slave CU.
●DU設定処理
 次いで、会議システムSは、マスターCUに接続されたマスターDUのDU設定処理(S3)を実行する。DU設定処理(S3)は、前述したDU設定処理(図20)と同じである。
DU Setting Process Next, the conference system S executes a DU setting process (S3) of the master DU connected to the master CU. The DU setting process (S3) is the same as the DU setting process (FIG. 20) described above.
●スレーブDU設定処理
 次いで、会議システムSは、スレーブDU設定処理(S106)を実行する。スレーブDU設定処理(S106)は、スレーブCUに接続されたスレーブDUの設定を行う処理である。
Next, the conference system S executes a slave DU setting process (S106). The slave DU setting process (S106) is a process of setting a slave DU connected to the slave CU.
 図38は、スレーブDU設定処理(S106)における会議システムSの情報処理を示すシーケンス図である。 FIG. 38 is a sequence diagram showing information processing of the conference system S in the slave DU setting process (S106).
 マスターCUの制御部16は、マスターCUの記憶部13からユニット設定情報DBを読み出して(S1061)、スレーブDUの設定を行うユニット設定コマンドをマスターCUの通信部11に送信する。マスターCUの通信部11は、ユニット設定コマンドを乗せた設定パケットを、スレーブCUに送信する(S1062a)。 The control unit 16 of the master CU reads the unit setting information DB from the storage unit 13 of the master CU (S1061), and transmits a unit setting command for setting the slave DU to the communication unit 11 of the master CU. The communication unit 11 of the master CU transmits a setting packet carrying a unit setting command to the slave CU (S1062a).
 設定パケットを受信したスレーブCUは、設定パケットをスレーブDUに送信する(S1062b)。設定パケットを受信したスレーブDUは、ユニット設定コマンドに従い、ユニット設定を変更する(S1063)。 The slave CU that has received the setting packet transmits the setting packet to the slave DU (S1062b). The slave DU that has received the setting packet changes the unit setting according to the unit setting command (S1063).
 スレーブCUの通信部11は、ユニット設定の変更を実行したスレーブDUから設定パケットを受信する(S1064b)。 The communication unit 11 of the slave CU receives the setting packet from the slave DU which has executed the change of the unit setting (S1064b).
 スレーブCUの通信部11は、受信した設定パケットをマスターCUに送信する(S1065b)。 The communication unit 11 of the slave CU transmits the received setting packet to the master CU (S1065b).
 マスターCUの通信部11は、スレーブCUから設定パケットを受信する(S1064a)。 The communication unit 11 of the master CU receives the setting packet from the slave CU (S1064a).
●プライオリティ再設定処理
 次いで、会議システムSは、プライオリティ再設定処理(S107)を実行する。プライオリティ再設定処理(S107)は、CU1同士の接続状態に変更が生じた(新CUカウント値と旧CUカウント値とが不一致となった)場合に、各CU1のプライオリティの設定と、会議システムS全体のプライオリティの設定と、の間に生ずる矛盾状態の解消を自動的に行う処理である。矛盾状態は、プライオリティが設定されたDU2の数が、発話可能最大数と同じ、もしくは発話可能最大数よりも多い状態である。すなわち、例えば、矛盾状態は、会議システムS全体の発話可能最大数が5台のとき、会議システムS全体のプライオリティが設定されたDU2の数が7台となるような状態である。この矛盾状態は、例えば、4台のDU2にプライオリティが設定されたCU1に、3台のDU2にプライオリティが設定されたCU1を接続した場合に生じ得る。
Priority Resetting Process Next, the conference system S executes a priority resetting process (S107). In the priority resetting process (S107), when there is a change in the connection state between the CU1 (when the new CU count value and the old CU count value do not match), the setting of the priority of each CU1, and the conference system S It is a process that automatically resolves the contradictory condition that occurs between the setting of the overall priority and the other. The contradiction state is a state in which the number of priority-set DUs 2 is equal to or greater than the maximum allowable number of utterances. That is, for example, in the contradiction state, when the maximum number of utterances of the entire conference system S is five, the number of DU2 to which the priority of the entire conference system S is set is seven. This contradiction state may occur, for example, when CU1 in which priorities are set to four DU2s and CU1 in which priorities are set to three DU2s are connected.
 図39は、会議システムSが備えるCU1のプライオリティ再設定処理におけるCU1の情報処理を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the information processing of CU1 in the priority resetting process of CU1 included in the conference system S.
 マスターCUの制御部16は、マスターCUの記憶部13からユニット設定情報DBを読み出す(S1071)。マスターCUの制御部16は、ユニット設定情報DBを参照して、プライオリティが設定されているDU2の数(以下「プライオリティ設定数」という。)と、マスターCUに設定される会議システムS全体の最大話者設定数と、を比較する(S1072)。 The control unit 16 of the master CU reads the unit setting information DB from the storage unit 13 of the master CU (S1071). The control unit 16 of the master CU refers to the unit setting information DB to determine the number of DUs 2 to which the priority is set (hereinafter referred to as "the number of priority settings") and the maximum of the entire conference system S set to the master CU. The speaker setting number is compared with (S1072).
 プライオリティ設定数が最大話者設定数以上のとき(S1072の「はい」)、マスターCUの制御部16は、ユニット設定情報DBにユニット設定情報が記憶されているDU2のうち、現在接続されていないDU(以下「非接続DU」という。)2のプライオリティの設定を1台ずつオフにする(S1073)。非接続DU2のプライオリティの設定をオフにする処理は、相対IDの数値の大きいCU1(本実施の形態ではCU1B)のユニット設定情報DBにユニット設定情報が記憶されているDU2から順に実行される。すなわち、スレーブCUに接続されているスレーブDUの処理(プライオリティの更新)は、マスターCUに接続されているマスターDUの処理(プライオリティの更新)よりも、優先される。 When the priority setting number is equal to or more than the maximum speaker setting number (“YES” in S1072), the control unit 16 of the master CU is not currently connected among DU2 whose unit setting information is stored in the unit setting information DB. The setting of the priority of DU (hereinafter referred to as "non-connected DU") 2 is turned off one by one (S1073). The process of turning off the setting of the priority of the non-connected DU2 is executed sequentially from DU2 in which unit setting information is stored in the unit setting information DB of CU1 (CU1B in this embodiment) having a large numerical value of relative ID. That is, the processing of the slave DU connected to the slave CU (update of the priority) is prioritized over the processing of the master DU connected to the master CU (update of the priority).
 プライオリティ設定数が最大話者設定数よりも小さいとき(S1072の「いいえ」)、会議システムSは、プライオリティ再設定処理(S107)を終了する。 When the priority setting number is smaller than the maximum speaker setting number ("No" in S1072), the conference system S ends the priority resetting process (S107).
 次いで、マスターCUの制御部16は、プライオリティ設定数と最大話者設定数とを比較する(S1074)。プライオリティ設定数が最大話者設定数以上のとき(S1074の「はい」)、マスターCUの制御部16は、非接続DU2の残数を確認(特定)する(S1075)。非接続DU2の残数が有るとき(S1075の「はい」)、マスターCUの制御部16は、非接続DU2のプライオリティの設定をオフにする処理を続ける(S1073)。 Next, the control unit 16 of the master CU compares the priority setting number with the maximum speaker setting number (S1074). When the priority setting number is equal to or more than the maximum speaker setting number (“YES” in S1074), the control unit 16 of the master CU checks (specifies) the remaining number of non-connected DUs (S1075). When there is the remaining number of unconnected DU2 (“YES” in S1075), the control unit 16 of the master CU continues the process of turning off the setting of the priority of unconnected DU2 (S1073).
 非接続DU2の残数が無いとき(S1075の「いいえ」)、マスターCUの制御部16は、現在接続されているDU(以下「接続DU」という。)2のプライオリティの設定を1台ずつオフにする(S1076)。接続DU2のプライオリティの設定をオフにする処理は、相対IDの数値の大きいCU1に接続されているDU2のうち、相対IDの大きいDU2から順に実行される。 When there is no remaining number of unconnected DU2 (“NO” in S1075), the control unit 16 of the master CU turns off the setting of the priority of the currently connected DU (hereinafter referred to as “connected DU”) 2 one by one. (S1076). The process of turning off the setting of the priority of the connection DU2 is executed in order from the DU2 with the largest relative ID among the DU2 connected to the CU1 with the largest relative ID number.
 次いで、マスターCUの制御部16は、プライオリティ設定数と最大話者設定数とを比較する(S1077)。プライオリティ設定数が最大話者設定数以上のとき(S1077の「はい」)、マスターCUの制御部16は、接続DU2のプライオリティの設定をオフにする処理を続ける(S1076)。 Next, the control unit 16 of the master CU compares the priority setting number with the maximum speaker setting number (S1077). When the priority setting number is equal to or more than the maximum speaker setting number (“YES” in S1077), the control unit 16 of the master CU continues the process of turning off the setting of the priority of the connection DU2 (S1076).
 プライオリティ設定数が最大話者設定数よりも小さくなったとき(S1074の「いいえ」、S1077の「いいえ」)、マスターCUの制御部16は、マスターCUの記憶部13のユニット設定情報DBに記憶されているユニット設定情報を更新する。スレーブCUの制御部16は、マスターCUの記憶部13のユニット設定情報DBに記憶されているユニット設定情報の更新に連動して、スレーブCUの記憶部13のユニット設定情報DBに記憶されているユニット設定情報を更新する。その結果、各CU1の記憶部13に記憶されるDU2ごとのプライオリティの設定は、更新される。会議システムSは、プライオリティ再設定処理(S107)を終了する。 When the priority setting number becomes smaller than the maximum speaker setting number ("No" in S1074, "No" in S1077), the control unit 16 of the master CU stores the unit setting information DB of the storage unit 13 of the master CU. Update the unit setting information. The control unit 16 of the slave CU is stored in the unit setting information DB of the storage unit 13 of the slave CU in conjunction with the update of the unit setting information stored in the unit setting information DB of the storage unit 13 of the master CU. Update unit setting information. As a result, the setting of the priority for each DU 2 stored in the storage unit 13 of each CU 1 is updated. The conference system S ends the priority resetting process (S107).
 このように、会議システムSは、CU1同士の接続状態の変更があった場合に、自動的にDU2のプライオリティの設定を変更する。換言すれば、会議システムSは、新CUカウント値と旧CUカウント値とが不一致のとき、発話可能なDU2ごとのプライオリティの設定を更新する。そのため、本発明にかかる会議システムでは、前述した矛盾状態が生じない。また、会議システムSは、システム管理者による、CU1同士の接続状態に応じたプライオリティの設定を不要にする。そのため、システム管理者のプライオリティ再設定の負担は軽減される。 Thus, the conference system S automatically changes the setting of the priority of DU2 when there is a change in the connection state of the CU1. In other words, when the new CU count value and the old CU count value do not match, the conference system S updates the setting of the priority for each of the speech-enabled DUs 2. Therefore, in the conference system according to the present invention, the aforementioned contradiction does not occur. In addition, the conference system S eliminates the need for setting of the priority according to the connection state of the CU 1 by the system administrator. Therefore, the burden of system administrator's priority resetting is reduced.
 なお、プライオリティ再設定処理は、CU接続状態確認処理においてスレーブCUの接続台数が減少したとき、すなわち、マスターCUの記憶部13に記憶されているスレーブCUの接続台数(旧CUカウント値)が新たに認識されたスレーブCUの接続台数(新CUカウント値)よりも大きいとき(不一致のとき)、実行される態様でもよい。すなわち、例えば、プライオリティ再設定処理は、スレーブCUの接続台数が減少したとき、接続台数の変更前後でのプライオリティが設定されたDU2の数が同じとなるように処理してもよい。具体的には、プライオリティ再設定処理は、マスターCUの記憶部13に記憶されているマスターDUの優先権限のうち、一部のマスターDUの優先権限の優先順位を上げる(または、プライオリティの設定をオンにする)ように処理してもよい。 In the priority resetting process, when the number of connected slave CUs decreases in the CU connection state confirmation process, that is, the number of connected slave CUs (old CU count value) stored in the storage unit 13 of the master CU is newly added. It may be executed when the number of connected slave CUs (new CU count value) recognized by is larger (when it does not match). That is, for example, when the number of connected slave CUs decreases, the priority resetting process may be performed so that the number of DU2 to which the priority is set is the same before and after the change of the number of connected slaves. Specifically, in the priority resetting process, among the priority authorities of the master DUs stored in the storage unit 13 of the master CU, the priority authorities of some of the master DUs are prioritized (or priority setting is performed). It may be processed to turn on).
 また、プライオリティ再設定処理は、CU接続状態確認処理においてスレーブCUの接続台数の増加が確認されたとき、マスターCUの記憶部13に記憶されているマスターDUの優先権限のうち、一部のマスターDUの優先権限の優先順位を下げる(または、プライオリティの設定をオフにする)ように処理してもよい。すなわち、マスターCUの記憶部13に記憶されているスレーブCUの接続台数(旧CUカウント値)が新たに認識したスレーブCUの接続台数(新CUカウント値)よりも小さいとき(不一致のとき)、プライオリティ再設定処理は、前述のスレーブDUから優先権限の優先順位を下げるのではなく、一部のマスターDUの優先権限の優先順位を下げる(または、プライオリティの設定をオフにする)ように処理してもよい。 In the priority resetting process, when an increase in the number of connected slave CUs is confirmed in the CU connection state confirmation process, some masters among the priority authorities of the master DUs stored in the storage unit 13 of the master CU It may be processed to lower the priority of the priority of DU (or to turn off the setting of the priority). That is, when the number of connected slave CUs (old CU count value) stored in the storage unit 13 of the master CU is smaller than the newly recognized number of connected slave CUs (new CU count value) (when they do not match) The priority reset process is performed to lower the priority of priority of some master DUs (or to turn off the setting of the priority), instead of lowering the priority of the priority from the slave DU described above. May be
●運用処理
 次いで、会議システムSは、運用処理(S4)を実行する。運用処理(S4)は、マスターCUがスレーブCUやスレーブDUの接続状態やスレーブDUの音声情報などを管理する点を除き、前述した運用処理(図22)と同じである。すなわち、マスターCUは、マスターDUとの間で運用パケットを繰り返し送受信すると共に、スレーブCUを介してスレーブDUとの間で運用パケットを繰り返し送受信する。このとき、スレーブCUは、スレーブDUとの間で運用パケットを繰り返し送受信する。
Operation Process Next, the conference system S executes an operation process (S4). The operation processing (S4) is the same as the above-described operation processing (FIG. 22) except that the master CU manages the connection state of the slave CU and slave DU, the audio information of the slave DU, and the like. That is, the master CU repeatedly transmits and receives operation packets with the master DU, and repeatedly transmits and receives operation packets with the slave DU via the slave CU. At this time, the slave CU repeatedly transmits and receives an operation packet to and from the slave DU.
●会議モード●
 会議システムSは、会議モードを備える。会議モードは、会議システムSの動作を規定する各種の設定項目のうち、設定項目「オーバーライド」「マイクオントリガー(プライオリティ設定)」「マイクオントリガー(プライオリティ非設定)」の各設定内容の組合せを特定する情報(組合情報)である。換言すれば、会議システムSは、会議モードに基づいて、オーバーライド、マイクオントリガー(プライオリティ設定)、マイクオントリガー(プライオリティ非設定)の各設定内容の組合せを特定する。設定項目のそれぞれについては、後述する。
● Conference mode ●
The conference system S has a conference mode. In the conference mode, among various setting items that define the operation of the conference system S, a combination of setting contents of setting items “override” “microphone on trigger (priority setting)” and “microphone on trigger (priority not set)” is specified. It is information (union information). In other words, the conference system S specifies a combination of setting contents of override, microphone on trigger (priority setting), and microphone on trigger (priority not set) based on the conference mode. Each of the setting items will be described later.
 図40は、会議モードの例を示す模式図である。
 同図は、会議システムSが3つの会議モード「フリートークモード」と、「リクエストトークモード」と、「フルリモートモード」と、を備えることを示す。同図は、会議モードごとのオーバーライド、マイクオントリガー(プライオリティ設定)、マイクオントリガー(プライオリティ非設定)の各設定内容の組合せを示す。
FIG. 40 is a schematic view showing an example of the conference mode.
The figure shows that the conference system S has three conference modes "free talk mode", "request talk mode", and "full remote mode". The figure shows the combination of the setting contents of override for each conference mode, microphone on trigger (priority setting), and microphone on trigger (priority not set).
 同図は、例えば、会議モード「フリートークモード」の場合、設定項目「オーバーライド」の設定内容として、「オフ」「オン/FIFO」「オフ/LIFO」のいずれかが選択可能であることを示す。また、同図は、例えば、会議モード「リクエストトークモード」の場合、設定項目「マイクオントリガー(プライオリティ設定)」の設定内容として、「手動トリガー」「自動トリガー」のいずれかが選択可能であることを示す。さらにまた、同図は、例えば、会議モード「フルリモートモード」の場合、設定項目「マイクオントリガー(プライオリティ非設定)」は、設定不可であることを示す。同図に示される設定項目ごとの各設定内容については、後述する。 For example, in the case of the conference mode "free talk mode", the same figure shows that any of "off", "on / FIFO" and "off / LIFO" can be selected as the setting content of the setting item "override". Also, in the case of the conference mode “request talk mode”, for example, either “manual trigger” or “automatic trigger” can be selected as the setting content of the setting item “mike on trigger (priority setting)”. Indicates Furthermore, for example, in the case of the conference mode "full remote mode", the same figure indicates that the setting item "microphone on trigger (priority not set)" can not be set. Each setting content for each setting item shown in the figure will be described later.
 会議システムSは、会議モードが選択される前に、予め、図40に示される会議モードを特定する情報と各設定項目の設定内容との組合せを示す情報を、CU1の記憶部13に記憶する。会議システムSは、システム管理者などが操作して操作端末4から入力された会議モードを特定する情報、すなわち、組合情報に基づいて記憶部13を参照し、同会議モードに対応する「オーバーライド」「マイクオントリガー(プライオリティ設定)」「マイクオントリガー(プライオリティ非設定)」の各設定内容を特定する。すなわち、記憶部13は、組合情報と、設定項目ごとの設定内容を特定する情報と、を関連付けて記憶する。 The conference system S stores in advance the information indicating the combination of the information specifying the conference mode shown in FIG. 40 and the setting content of each setting item in the storage unit 13 of CU 1 before the conference mode is selected. . The conference system S refers to the storage unit 13 based on the information identifying the conference mode input from the operation terminal 4 by the system administrator or the like, that is, “override” corresponding to the conference mode. Identify each setting of “Mike on trigger (priority setting)” and “Mike on trigger (priority not set)”. That is, the storage unit 13 associates and stores combination information and information specifying the setting content of each setting item.
●設定項目「オーバーライド」
 オーバーライドは、リクエストフラグを付与したDU2に対する、音声スロットと音声領域との割り当てにおいて、オーバーライドの「オン」・「オフ」を決定する割当方式に関する設定項目である。
● Setting item "override"
The override is a setting item related to an assignment method for determining “on” / “off” of the override in the assignment of the voice slot and the voice area to the DU 2 to which the request flag is assigned.
 オーバーライドは、音声スロットと音声領域とに空きのない状態で発話要求があった(運用パケットにリクエストフラグが付与された)ときに、すでに音声スロットと音声領域とが割り当てられたDU2の発話の終了を待たずに、発話要求があったDU2に音声スロットと音声領域とを割り当てる処理である。オーバーライドは、「オン」のときの割当方式と、「オフ」のときの割当方式と、含む。オーバーライドが「オン」のとき、オーバーライドは、FIFO(First In First Out)と、LIFO(Last In First Out)のいずれか一方の割当方式に応じた処理を行う。 Overriding is the end of the utterance of DU2 to which the voice slot and the voice area have already been assigned when there is a speech request without any space in the voice slot and the voice area (a request flag is given to the operation packet). Without waiting for a voice request and a voice area to be assigned to DU 2 for which there is a speech request. Overriding includes the assignment scheme when "on" and the assignment scheme when "off". When the override is "on", the override performs processing according to one of FIFO (First In First Out) and LIFO (Last In First Out) allocation schemes.
 FIFOは、すでに音声スロットと音声領域とが割り当てられているDU2のうち、最初に発話が許可されたDU2の音声スロットと音声領域との割り当てが外される割当方式である。FIFOでは、音声スロットと音声領域とが割り当てられているDU2は、ところてん式に音声スロットと音声領域との割り当てが外される。 The FIFO is an assignment scheme in which the assignment of the voice slot of DU 2 to which speech is permitted first and the voice domain is canceled among DU 2 to which the voice slot and voice domain have already been assigned. In the FIFO, DU2 to which a voice slot and a voice area are assigned is deallocated between the voice slot and the voice area.
 LIFOは、すでに音声スロットと音声領域とが割り当てられたDU2のうち、最後に発話が許可されたDU2の音声スロットと音声領域との割り当てが外される割当方式である。LIFOでは、音声スロットと音声領域とのうち、最後の空き音声スロットと音声領域とが割り当てられた(1つ前のタイミングで発話が許可された)DU2のみが入れ替わる。 LIFO is an allocation scheme in which, of DU 2 to which a voice slot and a voice area have already been assigned, the voice slot and voice area of DU 2 to which speech is permitted last are unassigned. In the LIFO, of the voice slots and the voice area, only the DU2 to which the last free voice slot and the voice area are assigned (the speech is permitted at the immediately preceding timing) is switched.
 一方、オーバーライドが「オフ」のときの割当方式は、すでに音声スロットと音声領域とが割り当てられたDU2のうち、発話が終了したDU2の音声スロットと音声領域の割り当てが外される割当方式である。すなわち、発話要求があったDU2には、すでに音声スロットと音声領域とが割り当てられたDU2(aとする)の発話の終了を待って、発話の終了したDU2(a)に割り当てられていた音声スロットと音声領域とが割り当てられる。つまり、前述したリクエスト処理(図28)は、オーバーライドが「オフ」のときに実行される処理である。 On the other hand, the assignment method when the override is "off" is an assignment method in which the assignment of the voice slot and voice region of DU2 for which the speech has ended is canceled out of DU2 to which the voice slot and voice region are already assigned. . That is, after the end of the utterance of DU2 (a) to which an audio slot and an audio area have already been allocated to DU2 that has made an utterance request, the audio allocated to DU2 (a) for which the utterance has ended is awaited. Slots and voice areas are assigned. That is, the request process (FIG. 28) described above is a process executed when the override is “off”.
 複数の割当方式のうちのいずれかの割当方式を特定する情報(以下「割当方式情報」という。)は、組合情報と関連付けられて、記憶部13に記憶される。例えば、会議モード「フリートークモード」は、設定項目「オーバーライド」の設定内容「オフ」「オン/FIFO」「オン/LIFO」それぞれに対応する割当方式と関連付けられる。割当方式情報は、前述した制御情報に含まれる情報である。すなわち、例えば、設定項目「オーバーライド」において設定内容「オン/FIFO」が選択された場合、会議システムSは、音声スロットと音声領域との割り当てがところてん式に外される割当方式に従って、発話要求のあったDU2に音声スロットと音声領域とを割り当てる。 Information (hereinafter, referred to as “allocation method information”) specifying any one of the plurality of allocation methods is associated with the union information and stored in the storage unit 13. For example, the conference mode "free talk mode" is associated with the assignment method corresponding to the setting contents "off", "on / FIFO", and "on / LIFO" of the setting item "override". The assignment scheme information is information included in the control information described above. That is, for example, when the setting content “on / FIFO” is selected in the setting item “override”, the conference system S performs the speech request according to the allocation method in which the allocation of the audio slot and the audio area is canceled in a courtesy manner. A voice slot and a voice area are assigned to DU2 that was located.
●設定項目「マイクオントリガー」
 マイクオントリガーは、運用パケットにリクエストフラグを付与(発話要求)するためのトリガーの設定、すなわち、リクエストフラグの付与方式に関するモードである。マイクオントリガーは、プライオリティが設定されたDU(以下「プライオリティ設定DU」という。)2pに対する設定項目「マイクオントリガー(プライオリティ設定)」と、プライオリティが設定されていないDU(以下「プライオリティ非設定DU」という。)2nに対する設定項目「マイクオントリガー(プライオリティ非設定)」と、を含む。マイクオントリガーは、DU2に取り付けられたマイクロホン3をオンにするためのトリガーであり、前述した「手動トリガー」と「自動トリガー」との2つの付与方式を含む。マイクオントリガーでは、「手動トリガー」と「自動トリガー」いずれか一方の付与方式が選択される。
● Setting item "mike on trigger"
The microphone on trigger is a mode related to setting of a trigger for giving a request flag (speech request) to an operation packet, that is, a method for giving a request flag. The microphone on trigger is a setting item "mike on trigger (priority setting)" for a priority set DU (hereinafter referred to as "priority set DU") 2p and a DU not set priority (hereinafter referred to as "priority non-set DU" And 2) the setting item “mike on trigger (priority not set)” for 2 n. The microphone on trigger is a trigger for turning on the microphone 3 attached to the DU 2 and includes the two application methods of the “manual trigger” and the “automatic trigger” described above. In the microphone on trigger, either the "manual trigger" or the "automatic trigger" is selected.
 複数の付与方式のうちのいずれかの付与方式を特定する情報(以下「付与方式情報」という。)は、組合情報と関連付けられて、記憶部13に記憶される。例えば、会議モード「リクエストトークモード」は、設定項目「マイクオントリガー(プライオリティ設定)」の設定内容「手動トリガー」に対応する付与方式と関連付けられる。付与方式情報は、前述した制御情報に含まれる情報である。付与方式情報は、割当方式情報と関連付けられて記憶部13に記憶される。 Information (hereinafter referred to as “application system information”) specifying any one of the plurality of application systems is associated with the association information and stored in the storage unit 13. For example, the conference mode “request talk mode” is associated with the assignment method corresponding to the setting content “manual trigger” of the setting item “microphone on trigger (priority setting)”. The assignment scheme information is information included in the control information described above. The assignment scheme information is stored in the storage unit 13 in association with the assignment scheme information.
●会議モード「フリートークモード」
 フリートークモードは、音声スロットが割り当てられたDU2の使用者が自由に発言可能な会議モードである。プライオリティ設定DU2pには、常時、音声スロットと音声領域とが割り当てられる。プライオリティ非設定DU2nには、選択される割当方式に応じて音声スロットと音声領域とが割り当てられる。フリートークモードでは、音声スロットと音声領域とが自動的に割り当てられるため、発話要求の拒否という状況が発生しない。そのため、操作端末4は、フリートークモードにおいては必ずしも必要ではない。
● Conference mode "free talk mode"
The free talk mode is a conference mode in which the user of DU 2 to which a voice slot is assigned can freely speak. A voice slot and a voice area are always assigned to the priority setting DU 2 p. A voice slot and a voice area are assigned to the priority non-setting DU 2 n in accordance with the selected assignment scheme. In the free talk mode, since a voice slot and a voice area are automatically assigned, a situation of rejection of a speech request does not occur. Therefore, the operating terminal 4 is not necessarily required in the free talk mode.
 フリートークモードにおける設定項目「オーバーライド」は、「オフ」と、「オン/FIFO」と、「オン/LIFO」と、の3つの設定内容のうち、いずれか1つ選択される。 The setting item “override” in the free talk mode is selected from one of three setting contents of “off”, “on / FIFO”, and “on / LIFO”.
 フリートークモードにおける設定項目「マイクオントリガー」は、各DU2に個別に設定される。すなわち、例えば、手動トリガーが選択されたDU2と、自動トリガーが選択されたDU2とが混在してもよい。 The setting item “mic on trigger” in the free talk mode is individually set for each DU 2. That is, for example, DU2 in which the manual trigger is selected and DU2 in which the automatic trigger is selected may be mixed.
●会議モード「リクエストトークモード」
 リクエストトークモードは、プライオリティ非設定DU2nの発話要求が手動トリガーにて行われる会議モードである。プライオリティ設定DU2pには、常時、音声スロットと音声領域とが割り当てられる。プライオリティ非設定DU2nには、操作端末4からの要求に基づいて、発話要求の許可と拒否との選択が行われる。
● Conference mode "request talk mode"
The request talk mode is a conference mode in which an utterance request of the priority non-setting DU 2 n is manually triggered. A voice slot and a voice area are always assigned to the priority setting DU 2 p. Based on the request from the operation terminal 4, the priority non-setting DU 2 n is selected to permit or reject the speech request.
 リクエストトークモードにおける設定項目「オーバーライド」では、設定内容「オフ」が選択できない。すなわち、リクエストトークモードでは、オーバーライドの設定内容として、「オン/FIFO」と「オン/LIFO」のいずれか1つが選択される。 In the setting item "override" in the request talk mode, the setting content "off" can not be selected. That is, in the request talk mode, one of “on / FIFO” and “on / LIFO” is selected as the setting content of the override.
 リクエストトークモードにおける設定項目「マイクオントリガー」では、プライオリティ非設定DU2nの設定は、手動トリガーのみ選択される。 In the setting item “mic on trigger” in the request talk mode, only the manual trigger is selected as the setting of the priority non-setting DU 2 n.
●会議モード「フルリモートモード」
 フルリモートモードは、操作端末4からの操作によりプライオリティ非設定DU2nの発話が可能となる会議モードである。プライオリティ設定DU2pでは、常時、音声スロットと音声領域とが割り当てられる。プライオリティ非設定DU2nでは、操作端末4からの要求に基づいて、発話の許可が行われる。
● Conference mode "full remote mode"
The full remote mode is a conference mode in which the operation of the operation terminal 4 enables speech of the priority non-setting DU 2 n. In the priority setting DU 2 p, a voice slot and a voice area are always assigned. In the priority non-setting DU 2 n, the utterance is permitted based on the request from the operation terminal 4.
 フルリモートモードにおける設定項目「オーバーライド」では、設定内容「オフ」が選択できない。すなわち、フルリモートモードでは、オーバーライドの設定内容として、「オン/FIFO」と「オン/LIFO」のいずれか1つが選択される。 In the setting item "override" in the full remote mode, the setting content "off" can not be selected. That is, in the full remote mode, one of “on / FIFO” and “on / LIFO” is selected as the setting content of the override.
 フルリモートモードにおける設定項目「マイクオントリガー」では、プライオリティ非設定DU2nのトリガーの設定ができない。 In the setting item “mic on trigger” in the full remote mode, the trigger can not be set for the priority non-setting DU 2 n.
●会議モードに基づく会議システムの動作●
 次に、会議モードに基づく会議システムの動作について説明する。会議システムSは、複数の会議モードの中から選択された会議モードに応じて定まる、各DU2の音声スロットと音声領域との割当方式や、リクエストフラグの付与方式に基づいて動作する。
● Operation of the conference system based on the conference mode ●
Next, the operation of the conference system based on the conference mode will be described. The conference system S operates based on the assignment method of the voice slot and the voice area of each DU 2 and the assignment method of the request flag, which are determined according to the conference mode selected from the plurality of conference modes.
 図41は、会議モードの選択(S200)の情報処理を示すフローチャートである。
 会議モードの選択(S200)は、例えば、前述の会議システムSにより実行される情報処理において、DU情報取得処理(図17、図18)とDU設定処理(図20、図21)との間に実行される。
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing information processing of conference mode selection (S200).
The selection of the conference mode (S200) is, for example, between the DU information acquisition process (FIGS. 17 and 18) and the DU setting process (FIGS. 20 and 21) in the information processing performed by the conference system S described above. To be executed.
 先ず、操作端末4は、システム管理者などの操作により、操作端末4に接続されているCU1(マスターCU)の記憶部13から組合情報を読み出して、記憶部43に記憶する(S2001)。 First, the operation terminal 4 reads the combination information from the storage unit 13 of the CU 1 (master CU) connected to the operation terminal 4 by the operation of the system administrator or the like, and stores the combination information in the storage unit 43 (S2001).
 次いで、会議モードが選択される(S2002)。すなわち、例えば、操作端末4は、後述する準備画面を介して、システム管理者などにフリートークモード(S201)と、リクエストトークモード(S202)と、フルリモートモード(S203)と、の中から会議内容などに基づいて、1の会議モードを選択させる。操作端末4の制御部46は、記憶部43に記憶されている複数の組合情報の中から、選択された会議モードに応じた組合情報を特定する(S2003)。ここで、例えば、図40に示す会議モード「フリートークモード」が選択されたとき、操作端末4の制御部46は、各DU2の設定項目「オーバーライド」の設定内容として、システム管理者などに「オフ」「オン/FIFO」「オン/LIFO」の中から選択させる画面を表示部44に表示させる。同様に、操作端末4の制御部46は、各DU2の設定項目「マイクオントリガー(プライオリティ設定)」と「マイクオントリガー(プライオリティ非設定)」との設定内容として、システム管理者などに「手動トリガー」「自動トリガー」の中から選択させる画面を表示部44に表示させる。表示部44に表示された画面が操作されることで、DU2ごとの音声スロットと音声領域との割当方式やリクエストフラグの付与方式が決定される。操作端末4の通信部41は、決定されたDU2ごとの音声スロットと音声領域との割当方式と、リクエストフラグの付与方式とを、特定された組合情報として、CU1に送信する(S2004)。CU1は、操作端末4から受信した組合情報をDU2ごとのユニット設定情報として記憶部13に記憶する(すでにユニット設定情報が記憶されているDU2に関しては、記憶部13に記憶されているユニット設定情報が更新される)。CU1は、更新されたユニット設定情報に基づいて、前述のDU設定処理(図20、21)を実行し、DU2ごとのユニット設定を変更する。その結果、会議システムSは、選択された会議モードに基づいて動作する。 Next, the conference mode is selected (S2002). That is, for example, the operation terminal 4 allows the system administrator or the like to make a meeting from the free talk mode (S201), the request talk mode (S202), and the full remote mode (S203) via a preparation screen to be described later. Let one of the conference modes be selected based on etc. The control unit 46 of the operation terminal 4 specifies combination information according to the selected conference mode from among the plurality of combination information stored in the storage unit 43 (S2003). Here, for example, when the conference mode “free talk mode” shown in FIG. 40 is selected, the control unit 46 of the operation terminal 4 sets “off” to the system administrator or the like as the setting content of the setting item “override” of each DU2. “On / FIFO” “On / LIFO” is displayed on the display unit 44 to be selected. Similarly, the control unit 46 of the operation terminal 4 sets “manual trigger” to a system administrator or the like as setting contents of setting items “mike on trigger (priority setting)” and “mike on trigger (priority not set)” of each DU 2 The display unit 44 displays a screen for selecting one of “automatic trigger”. By operating the screen displayed on the display unit 44, the assignment method between the voice slot and the voice area for each DU 2 and the assignment method of the request flag are determined. The communication unit 41 of the operation terminal 4 transmits the determined assignment method of the voice slot and the voice area for each DU 2 and the assignment method of the request flag as the identified combination information to the CU 1 (S 2004). CU1 stores the combination information received from operation terminal 4 in storage unit 13 as unit setting information for each DU 2 (with regard to DU 2 in which unit setting information is already stored, unit setting information stored in storage unit 13) Is updated). CU1 executes the above-mentioned DU setting process (FIG. 20, 21) based on the updated unit setting information, and changes the unit setting for each DU2. As a result, the conference system S operates based on the selected conference mode.
●会議モード「フリートークモード」のとき
 前述したとおり、DU2は、個別に設定されたマイクオントリガーに基づいて発話要求を行う。
Conference Mode “Free Talk Mode” As described above, DU 2 makes a speech request based on the individually set microphone on trigger.
 図42は、フリートークモードにおけるCU1の情報処理を示すフローチャートである。
 先ず、CU1の制御部16は、DU2からの発話要求を待つ(S2011の「いいえ」)。DU2から発話要求があったとき(S2011の「はい」)、CU1の制御部16は、発話要求を行ったDU2がプライオリティ設定DU2pか、プライオリティ非設定DU2nか、を確認する(S2012)。
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the information processing of CU1 in the free talk mode.
First, the control unit 16 of CU1 waits for a speech request from DU2 ("No" in S2011). When a speech request is issued from DU2 ("YES" in S2011), the control unit 16 of CU1 checks whether DU2 which has made the speech request is the priority setting DU2p or the priority non-setting DU2n (S2012).
 発話要求を行ったDU2がプライオリティ設定DU2pのとき(S2012の「はい」)、CU1の制御部16は、プライオリティ設定DU2pに、既定の音声スロットと音声領域とを割り当てる(S2013)。 When the speech request DU2 is the priority setting DU2p ("Yes" in S2012), the control unit 16 of the CU1 assigns a predetermined sound slot and a sound area to the priority setting DU2p (S2013).
 発話要求を行ったDU2がプライオリティ非設定DU2nのとき(S2012の「いいえ」)、CU1の制御部16は、音声スロットと音声領域との空きを確認する(S2014)。 When DU2 that has made a speech request is priority unset DU 2 n (“No” in S 2012), the control unit 16 of CU 1 checks the space between the voice slot and the voice area (S 2014).
 音声スロットと音声領域とに空きがあるとき(S2014の「はい」)、CU1の制御部16は、プライオリティ非設定DU2nに、空いている音声スロットと音声領域とを割り当てる(S2015)。 When there is a vacancy in the voice slot and the voice area (“YES” in S2014), the control unit 16 of the CU 1 assigns a vacant voice slot and a voice area to the priority non-setting DU 2 n (S2015).
 音声スロットと音声領域とに空きがないとき(S2014の「いいえ」)、CU1の制御部16は、プライオリティ非設定DU2nのオーバーライドの設定内容を確認する(S2016)。 When there is no space between the voice slot and the voice area (“No” in S2014), the control unit 16 of the CU 1 confirms the setting content of the override of the priority non-setting DU 2 n (S 2016).
 オーバーライドの設定内容が「オン」のとき(S2016の「はい」)、CU1の制御部16は、FIFOとLIFOのいずれかの設定内容に応じて、プライオリティ非設定DU2nに音声スロットと音声領域とを強制的に割り当てる(オーバーライド)(S2017)。 When the setting content of the override is “on” (“Yes” in S2016), the control unit 16 of the CU 1 sets the voice slot and the voice area to the priority non-setting DU 2 n according to the setting content of either FIFO or LIFO. Forced assignment (override) (S2017).
 オーバーライドの設定内容が「オフ」のとき(S2016の「いいえ」)、CU1の制御部16は、再度、音声スロットと音声領域との空きを確認する(S2014)。このとき、プライオリティ非設定DU2nは、音声スロットと音声領域とが空くまで発話待ち状態(リクエスト待ち状態)となる。 When the setting content of the override is “OFF” (“NO” in S2016), the control unit 16 of the CU 1 checks again the space between the audio slot and the audio area (S2014). At this time, the priority non-setting DU 2 n is in the speech wait state (request wait state) until the voice slot and the voice area become free.
●会議モード「リクエストトークモード」のとき
 前述したとおり、リクエストトークモードでは、プライオリティ非設定DU2nのマイクオントリガーは、予め手動モードに設定される。プライオリティ設定DU2pのマイクオントリガーは、予め、自動モードと手動モードのいずれか一方に設定される。
Meeting Mode “Request Talk Mode” As described above, in the request talk mode, the microphone on trigger of priority non-setting DU 2 n is set in advance to the manual mode. The microphone on trigger of the priority setting DU 2 p is previously set to either the automatic mode or the manual mode.
 図43は、リクエストトークモードにおけるCU1の情報処理を示すフローチャートである。
 CU1の制御部16は、DU2からの発話要求を待つ(S2021の「いいえ」)。DU2から発話要求があったとき(S2021の「はい」)、CU1の制御部16は、発話要求を行ったDU2がプライオリティ設定DU2pか、プライオリティ非設定DU2nか、を確認する(S2022)。
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing information processing of CU1 in the request talk mode.
The control unit 16 of CU1 waits for a speech request from DU2 (“NO” in S2021). When a speech request is issued from DU2 ("Yes" in S2021), the control unit 16 of CU1 checks whether DU2 which has made the speech request is the priority setting DU2p or the priority non-setting DU2n (S2022).
 発話要求を行ったDU2がプライオリティ設定DU2pのとき(S2022の「はい」)、CU1の制御部16は、プライオリティ設定DU2pに既定の音声スロットと音声領域とを割り当てる(S2023)。 When DU2 that has made a speech request is priority setting DU2p ("Yes" in S2022), the control unit 16 of CU1 assigns a predetermined voice slot and voice area to the priority setting DU2p (S2023).
 発話要求を行ったDU2がプライオリティ非設定DU2nのとき(S2022の「いいえ」)、CU1の制御部16は、プライオリティ非設定DU2nを発話要求リストにリストアップする(S2024)。発話要求リストは、例えば、発話要求を行ったDU2を要求順に並べた表である。 When DU2 which made speech request is priority unset DU2n ("No" of S2022), control part 16 of CU1 lists priority unset DU2n in a speech request list (S2024). The speech request list is, for example, a table in which DUs 2 which have made speech requests are arranged in the order of request.
 発話要求リストにリストアップされたプライオリティ非設定DU2nは、発話要求の許可と拒否のいずれか一方が選択されるまで、リクエスト待ち状態となる。発話要求の許可と拒否とは、例えば、議長などの操作端末4の操作により選択される。 The priority unset DU 2 n listed in the speech request list is in a request waiting state until either speech request permission or rejection is selected. The permission and the rejection of the speech request are selected by the operation of the operation terminal 4 such as the chairperson, for example.
 発話要求の許可が選択されたとき(S2025の「はい」)、CU1の制御部16は、FIFOとLIFOのいずれかの設定内容に応じて、そのプライオリティ非設定DU2nに音声スロットと音声領域とを強制的に割り当てる(S2026)。このとき、CU1の制御部16は、発話要求が許可されたプライオリティ非設定DU2nを発話要求リストから削除する(S2027)。 When permission to request speech is selected (“YES” in S 2025), the control unit 16 of CU 1 sets the priority unset DU 2 n to an audio slot and an audio area according to the setting contents of either FIFO or LIFO. Forced allocation (S2026). At this time, the control unit 16 of the CU 1 deletes the priority non-setting DU 2 n for which the speech request is permitted from the speech request list (S 2027).
 発話要求が拒否されたとき(S2025の「いいえ」)、CU1の制御部16は、そのプライオリティ非設定DU2nを発話要求リストから削除する(S2028)。 When the speech request is rejected (“No” in S2025), the control unit 16 of the CU 1 deletes the priority non-setting DU 2 n from the speech request list (S 2028).
●会議モード「フルリモートモード」のとき
 前述のとおり、フルリモートモードでは、プライオリティ非設定DU2nのマイクオントリガーは、何も設定されない(オフ)。すなわち、プライオリティ非設定DU2nは、発話要求をすることができない。プライオリティ設定DU2pのマイクオントリガーは、予め、自動モードと手動モードのいずれか一方に設定される。
● Conference mode "full remote mode" As mentioned above, in the full remote mode, nothing is set for microphone on trigger of priority unset DU2n (off). That is, the priority non-setting DU 2 n can not make a speech request. The microphone on trigger of the priority setting DU 2 p is previously set to either the automatic mode or the manual mode.
 図44は、フルリモートモードにおけるCU1の情報処理を示すフローチャートである。
 先ず、CU1の制御部16は、DU2からの発話要求と、操作端末4からの要求と、のいずれかの要求を待つ(S2031の「いいえ」)。要求があったとき(S2031の「はい」)、CU1の制御部16は、その要求がDU2からの発話要求と、操作端末4からの要求と、のどちらかの確認を行う(S2032)。前述のとおり、発話要求は、プライオリティ設定DU2pのみが行う。操作端末4からの要求は、プライオリティ非設定DU2nに対して行われる。
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing information processing of CU1 in the full remote mode.
First, the control unit 16 of CU1 waits for one of an utterance request from DU2 and a request from the operation terminal 4 (“NO” in S2031). When there is a request (“YES” in S2031), the control unit 16 of the CU 1 confirms whether the request is an utterance request from DU 2 or a request from the operation terminal 4 (S2032). As described above, the speech request is made only by the priority setting DU 2 p. The request from the operation terminal 4 is made to the priority non-setting DU 2 n.
 要求が発話要求であるとき(S2032の「発話要求」)、CU1の制御部16は、発話要求を行ったプライオリティ設定DU2pに既定の音声スロットと音声領域とを割り当てる(S2033)。 When the request is a speech request (“speech request” in S2032), the control unit 16 of the CU 1 assigns a predetermined voice slot and a voice area to the priority setting DU 2 p that has made the speech request (S 2033).
 要求が操作端末4からの要求であるとき(S2032の「端末操作」)、CU1の制御部16は、音声スロットと音声領域との空きを確認する(S2034)。 When the request is a request from the operation terminal 4 (“terminal operation” in S2032), the control unit 16 of the CU 1 confirms the free space between the audio slot and the audio area (S2034).
 音声スロットに空きがあるとき(S2034の「はい」)、CU1の制御部16は、操作端末4により発話が要求されているプライオリティ非設定DU2nに空いている音声スロットと音声領域とを割り当てる(S2035)。 When there is a vacancy in the voice slot (“YES” in S2034), the control unit 16 of the CU 1 allocates a vacated voice slot and voice area to the priority non-setting DU 2 n whose speech is requested by the operation terminal 4 (S2035) ).
 音声スロットと音声領域とに空きがないとき(S2034の「いいえ」)、CU1の制御部16は、FIFOとLIFOのいずれかの設定内容に応じて、そのプライオリティ非設定DU2nに音声スロットと音声領域とを強制的に割り当てる(S2036)。 When there is no space in the voice slot and the voice area ("No" in S2034), the control unit 16 of the CU1 sets the voice slot and the voice area in the priority non-setting DU2n according to the setting content of either FIFO or LIFO. And are forcibly allocated (S2036).
●会議モードのまとめ
 このように、会議システムSは、マイクオントリガーモードと、オーバーライドモードと、の設定内容が組み合わされた選択可能な複数の会議モードを備える。そのため、例えば、総務部門の社員などであって、会議の開始直前に会議システムSの動作設定の準備を行う者は、複数の会議モードの中から最適な会議モードを適宜選択することで、容易に会議システムSの動作設定の準備を行うことができる。
Summary of Conference Mode As described above, the conference system S has a plurality of selectable conference modes in which the settings of the microphone on trigger mode and the override mode are combined. Therefore, for example, a person who is an employee of the general affairs department and who prepares for operation setting of the conference system S immediately before the start of a conference can be easily selected by appropriately selecting the optimal conference mode from a plurality of conference modes. The operation setting of the conference system S can be prepared.
●操作端末の入力画面●
 会議システムSの動作を制御する各種の制御情報は、例えば、操作端末4の表示部44に表示される入力画面を介して入力されて、CU1の記憶部13に記憶される。入力画面は、制御情報の入力・変更の際に、システム管理者などに用いられる画面である。すなわち、例えば、入力画面は、CU1やDU2の設定の入力のための画面である。前述のとおり、制御情報は、例えば、会議システムSのシステム設定に関する情報や、プライオリティに関する情報、発話要求リストなどを含む。操作端末4の制御部46は、入力画面に対応した制御情報をCU1の記憶部13から読み出して、表示部44に表示させる。
● Input screen of operation terminal ●
Various control information for controlling the operation of the conference system S is input, for example, via an input screen displayed on the display unit 44 of the operation terminal 4 and stored in the storage unit 13 of the CU 1. The input screen is a screen used by a system administrator or the like at the time of input / change of control information. That is, for example, the input screen is a screen for inputting settings of CU1 and DU2. As described above, the control information includes, for example, information on system settings of the conference system S, information on priority, a speech request list, and the like. The control unit 46 of the operation terminal 4 reads control information corresponding to the input screen from the storage unit 13 of the CU 1 and causes the display unit 44 to display the control information.
 入力画面は、例えば、会議システム初期設定画面(以下「初期画面」という。)と、会議準備画面(以下「準備画面」という。)と、会議進行画面(以下「進行画面」という。)と、を含む。操作端末4の制御部46により、後述する所定の条件に基づいて、1の入力画面が選択される。すなわち、例えば、制御部46は、所定の条件が成立したか否かを判定し、その判定の結果に基づいて、表示部44に表示される入力画面を、初期画面と準備画面と進行画面との中から選択する。所定の条件は、例えば、CU1とDU2と間の物理的・通信的な接続の状態(接続の有無など)、特定の項目の設定の完了、DU2の接続状態の異常の発生、特定のDU(例えば、通訳ユニットなど)の接続状態などである。すなわち、例えば、制御部46は、複数の制御情報のうち特定の制御情報がCU1の記憶部13に記憶されている否かを判定した結果や、ユニット接続部12bにDU2が接続しているか否かの判定の結果や、ユニット接続部12bに複数のDU2のうちの特定のDU2が接続しているか否かの判定の結果や、ユニット接続部12bに接続しているDU2の接続異常が発生しているか否かの判定の結果、などに基づいて、表示部44に表示される入力画面を選択する。 The input screen is, for example, a conference system initial setting screen (hereinafter referred to as "initial screen"), a conference preparation screen (hereinafter referred to as "preparation screen"), and a conference progress screen (hereinafter referred to as "progress screen"). including. The control unit 46 of the operation terminal 4 selects one input screen based on a predetermined condition described later. That is, for example, the control unit 46 determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, and based on the result of the determination, the input screen displayed on the display unit 44 includes an initial screen, a preparation screen, and a progress screen. Choose from The predetermined conditions include, for example, the state of physical and communication connection between CU1 and DU2 (such as presence or absence of connection), completion of setting of a specific item, occurrence of abnormality of connection state of DU2, specific DU ( For example, the connection state of the interpretation unit etc. That is, for example, the control unit 46 determines whether or not specific control information among the plurality of control information is stored in the storage unit 13 of the CU 1, and whether or not DU2 is connected to the unit connection unit 12 b Result of the determination as to whether or not a specific DU2 of the plurality of DUs 2 is connected to the unit connection section 12b, or a connection abnormality of the DU 2 connected to the unit connection section 12b occurs. The input screen displayed on the display unit 44 is selected on the basis of the result of the determination as to whether or not it is present.
 図45は、会議システムSが備える操作端末4の表示部44に表示される入力画面の選択画面を示す模式図である。
 同図は、選択できる項目を実線で、選択できない項目を破線で示す。
FIG. 45 is a schematic view showing a selection screen of an input screen displayed on the display unit 44 of the operation terminal 4 included in the conference system S.
The figure shows items that can be selected by solid lines and items that can not be selected by dashed lines.
 会議システムSが起動すると、操作端末4の表示部44に選択画面が表示される。選択画面は、例えば、システム管理者や会議システムSの動作設定の準備を行う者などが、初期画面と、準備画面と、進行画面と、の中からいずれかの画面の選択を行う画面である。 When the conference system S is activated, a selection screen is displayed on the display unit 44 of the operation terminal 4. The selection screen is, for example, a screen for selecting one of the initial screen, the preparation screen, and the progress screen, such as a system administrator or a person who prepares the operation setting of the conference system S. .
 選択画面に選択可能に表示される入力画面は、例えば、CU1とDU2との通信状態に応じて、変化する。すなわち、例えば、CU1とDU2とが通信不可能あるとき、選択画面に表示される入力画面のうち、初期画面のみが選択可能である。CU1とDU2とが通信不可能とは、例えば、CU1にDU2が接続されていない状態などをいう。CU1とDU2とが通信可能であるとき、選択画面に表示される入力画面のうち、準備画面と進行画面とが選択可能である。CU1とDU2とが通信可能とは、例えば、CU1にDU2が接続されている状態などをいう。選択画面に選択可能に表示される入力画面は、操作端末4の制御部46により決定される。このように、選択可能な入力画面が所定の条件に応じて変化することで、情報の入力を行う者の入力画面の選択が容易になると共に、所定の条件に基づいた各種の設定を行うことができるため、設定される内容同士が矛盾するなどの誤操作や誤入力が低減される。 The input screen that is displayed selectably on the selection screen changes, for example, according to the communication state between CU1 and DU2. That is, for example, when CU1 and DU2 can not communicate, only the initial screen can be selected among the input screens displayed on the selection screen. The fact that CU1 and DU2 can not communicate means, for example, a state in which DU2 is not connected to CU1. When CU1 and DU2 can communicate, the preparation screen and the progress screen can be selected among the input screens displayed on the selection screen. Communication between CU1 and DU2 means, for example, a state in which DU2 is connected to CU1. The input screen displayed in a selectable manner on the selection screen is determined by the control unit 46 of the operation terminal 4. As described above, the selectable input screen changes according to the predetermined condition, thereby facilitating the selection of the input screen by the person who inputs the information and performing various settings based on the predetermined condition. Therefore, erroneous operations or erroneous inputs, such as contradiction in the contents to be set, are reduced.
 なお、本実施の形態における選択画面では、例えば、ログイン画面に入力される認証情報などにより、選択できる入力画面が変化してもよい。 In the selection screen in the present embodiment, for example, the selectable input screen may change according to authentication information or the like input to the login screen.
 また、選択画面は、例えば、CU1と複数のDU2とが通信可能であるとき、プライオリティの設定に関する情報が入力される画面を表示してもよい。 Further, the selection screen may display, for example, a screen to which information on the setting of the priority is input when the CU 1 and the plurality of DUs 2 can communicate.
 さらに、選択画面は、例えば、CU1と複数のDU2とが通信不可能であるとき、初期画面に通信情報が入力される画面を表示してもよい。 Furthermore, the selection screen may display a screen on which communication information is input on the initial screen, for example, when the CU 1 and the plurality of DUs 2 can not communicate.
 さらにまた、選択画面は、例えば、通訳ユニットなどの特定の用途に対応したDUがCU1に接続されたとき、特定の用途に対応した設定に関する情報が入力される画面を表示する態様でもよい。 Furthermore, the selection screen may be, for example, a mode for displaying a screen on which information on settings corresponding to a specific application is input when a DU corresponding to the specific application such as an interpretation unit is connected to the CU 1.
 さらにまた、選択画面で選択可能な入力画面は、本実施の形態に限定されない。すなわち、例えば、選択画面で選択可能な入力画面は、メンテナンス画面などの他の入力画面を含んでもよい。 Furthermore, the input screen that can be selected on the selection screen is not limited to the present embodiment. That is, for example, the input screen selectable on the selection screen may include another input screen such as a maintenance screen.
●初期画面
 図46は、初期画面の模式図である。
 初期画面は、例えば、システム管理者が会議システムSの設定を入力・変更する画面である。初期画面で表示される情報は、会議システムSのシステム設定に関する情報、例えば、サブネットマスクなどのCU1がDU2を特定するために(CU1とDU2とが通信するために)用いる通信情報や、ファームウェアに関する情報、CU1の端子設定情報、などの会議システムSの初期設定のための情報である。
Initial Screen FIG. 46 is a schematic view of the initial screen.
The initial screen is, for example, a screen on which the system administrator inputs / changes the setting of the conference system S. The information displayed on the initial screen is information related to the system settings of the conference system S, for example, communication information such as a subnet mask used by CU1 to identify DU2 (for communication between CU1 and DU2), and firmware It is information for initial setting of the conference system S, such as information, terminal setting information of CU1, and the like.
 初期画面において情報の入力が完了することで、CU1とDU2とは通信可能となる。初期画面において情報の入力が完了することで、選択画面において、準備画面と進行画面とが選択可能となる。 When the input of the information is completed in the initial screen, the CU1 and the DU2 can communicate. By completing the input of information on the initial screen, the preparation screen and the progress screen can be selected on the selection screen.
●準備画面
 図47は、準備画面の模式図である。
 準備画面は、例えば、会議システムSの動作設定の準備を行う者が、各DU2の設定を入力する画面である。準備画面で表示される情報は、各DU2のユニット設定情報、例えば、プライオリティの設定に関する情報や、マイクオントリガーの設定に関する情報、DU2の発光部28の発光色などの報知情報などである。これらの情報は、例えば、DU2の相対IDに関連付けられて準備画面内に表示される。
Preparation Screen FIG. 47 is a schematic view of the preparation screen.
The preparation screen is, for example, a screen on which a person who prepares for operation setting of the conference system S inputs the setting of each DU 2. The information displayed on the preparation screen is unit setting information of each DU 2, for example, information on setting of priority, information on setting of microphone on trigger, and notification information such as light emission color of the light emitting unit 28 of DU 2. These pieces of information are displayed, for example, in the preparation screen in association with the relative ID of DU2.
 準備画面に表示されるユニット設定情報、例えば、CU1に過去に接続されたDU2のユニット設定情報は、ユニット設定情報DBに記憶されている情報である。一方、CU1に新たに接続されたDU2のユニット設定情報は、前述のとおり、DU2の出荷時の設定(初期値)である。 The unit setting information displayed on the preparation screen, for example, the unit setting information of DU 2 connected to CU 1 in the past is information stored in the unit setting information DB. On the other hand, the unit setting information of DU2 newly connected to CU1 is the setting (initial value) at the time of shipping of DU2 as described above.
 図48は、情報入力後の準備画面の模式図である。
 同図は、図47に示す準備画面から新たに入力された情報をアンダーラインで示す。
FIG. 48 is a schematic view of a preparation screen after information input.
The drawing shows underlining the information newly input from the preparation screen shown in FIG.
●進行画面
 図49は、進行画面の模式図である。
 進行画面は、例えば、議長などの会議の進行を行う者が、各DU2の動作を制御する情報を入力する画面である。進行画面に表示される情報は、各DU2の制御に関する情報、例えば、発話要求リストや会議モードに関する情報などである。
Progress Screen FIG. 49 is a schematic view of the progress screen.
The progress screen is, for example, a screen on which a person who performs a meeting such as a chairperson inputs information for controlling the operation of each DU 2. The information displayed on the progress screen is information on control of each DU 2, for example, information on an utterance request list or a conference mode.
 進行画面は、例えば、前述した会議モードのリクエストトークモードやフルリモートモードが選択されたときに議長などに使用される。例えば、操作端末4は、進行画面に発話要求リストを表示して、発話要求に対する許可と拒否とを進行画面内で議長に選択させる。 The progress screen is used, for example, as a chairperson when the request talk mode of the conference mode described above or the full remote mode is selected. For example, the operation terminal 4 displays the speech request list on the progress screen, and causes the chairperson to select permission and rejection for the speech request in the progress screen.
●入力画面のまとめ
 このように、会議システムSでは、所定の条件に基づいて、操作端末4の制御部46により1の入力画面が選択される。そのため、会議システムSは、入力された設定内容同士の矛盾を回避する。すなわち、本実施の形態にかかる会議システムは、簡易な構成で確実な設定作業を実現する。
As described above, in the conference system S, the control unit 46 of the operation terminal 4 selects an input screen of 1 based on a predetermined condition. Therefore, the conference system S avoids contradiction between the input setting contents. That is, the conference system according to the present embodiment realizes reliable setting work with a simple configuration.
 なお、本発明における各入力画面は、画面に表示される項目に応じて、GUI(Graphic User Interface)の表示態様が異なっていてもよい。すなわち、例えば、会議システムSは、初期画面はアコーディオン形式、準備画面はウィザード形式、進行画面はタブ形式で表示してもよい。 Each input screen in the present invention may have a different display mode of GUI (Graphic User Interface) according to the items displayed on the screen. That is, for example, the conference system S may display the initial screen in an accordion format, the preparation screen in a wizard format, and the progress screen in a tab format.
 また、本発明における各入力画面は、操作端末4を操作する者の権限に応じて、表示部44に表示される項目が異なっていてもよい。その結果、操作端末4を操作する者の権限に相違する情報の入力や変更は、防止される。 Further, in each input screen in the present invention, items displayed on the display unit 44 may be different according to the authority of the person operating the operation terminal 4. As a result, the input or change of information different from the authority of the person operating the operation terminal 4 is prevented.
●まとめ
 以上説明した実施の形態によれば、会議システムSは、CU1からDU2へカウンタフラグを含むパケットを定期的に伝送して、相対IDと絶対IDとを関連付けたデータベースに記憶された情報を更新する。会議システムSでは、DU2に接続異常が発生して相対IDに変更が生じても、相対IDと絶対IDとの関連付けが更新されるため、DU2の接続状態の変更の前後における音声情報などの情報の齟齬は生じない。すなわち、本発明にかかる会議システムは、CUとDU2の接続状態を確実に管理すると共に、接続異常が発生した場合にDUからの情報を継続的に取得可能である。
According to the embodiment described above, the conference system S periodically transmits a packet including a counter flag from CU1 to DU2 and stores information stored in a database in which a relative ID is associated with an absolute ID. Update. In the conference system S, even if the connection abnormality occurs in DU2 and the relative ID is changed, the association between the relative ID and the absolute ID is updated, and thus information such as voice information before and after the change in the connection state of DU2 There is no problem with That is, the conference system according to the present invention reliably manages the connection state of the CU and the DU 2 and can continuously acquire information from the DU when a connection abnormality occurs.
 また、以上説明した実施の形態によれば、会議システムSは、CU1同士の接続や切断があった場合に、自動的にプライオリティの設定を変更する。そのため、本発明にかかる会議システムでは、前述した矛盾状態が生じない。また、本発明にかかる会議システムは、システム管理者による、CU同士の接続状態に応じたプライオリティの設定を不要とする。そのため、本発明にかかる会議システムは、システム管理者のプライオリティ再設定の負担を軽減する。 Further, according to the embodiment described above, the conference system S automatically changes the setting of the priority when there is a connection or disconnection between the CUs 1. Therefore, in the conference system according to the present invention, the aforementioned contradiction does not occur. Further, the conference system according to the present invention eliminates the need for the system administrator to set the priority according to the connection state of the CUs. Therefore, the conference system according to the present invention alleviates the burden of system administrator's priority re-setting.
 さらに、以上説明した実施の形態によれば、会議システムSは、DU2からの発話要求を定期的なリクエストフラグの処理により取り込み、音声スロットと音声領域との空きに応じてCU1にコマンドを送信させる。すなわち、会議システムSは、発話要求のたびにDU2からCU1にコマンドを送信しない。そのため、本発明にかかる会議システムは、一度に複数のDUから発話要求があっても情報処理の負荷を過剰に受けない。その結果、本発明にかかる会議システムSは、発話要求のたびにDUがCUからコマンドを受信するシステムと比べて、高い処理能力を必要としない。 Furthermore, according to the embodiment described above, the conference system S takes in the speech request from DU 2 by the processing of the periodic request flag, and causes the CU 1 to transmit a command according to the availability of the voice slot and the voice area. . That is, the conference system S does not transmit a command from DU2 to CU1 each time a speech request is made. Therefore, the conference system according to the present invention does not receive an excessive load of information processing even if there are speech requests from a plurality of DUs at one time. As a result, the conferencing system S according to the present invention does not require high processing power as compared to a system in which the DU receives a command from the CU each time it makes a speech request.
 さらにまた、以上説明した実施の形態によれば、発話要求をしたDU2は、音声スロットと音声領域とに空きがない場合に自動的にリクエスト待ち状態になる。そのため、本発明にかかる会議システムは、ソフトウェア上で全ての発話要求に応じる必要がなく、ソフトウェア上の情報処理の負荷が軽減される。 Furthermore, according to the embodiment described above, DU 2 which has made a speech request automatically enters a request waiting state when there is no space between the voice slot and the voice area. Therefore, the conference system according to the present invention does not need to respond to all the speech requests on software, and the load of information processing on software is reduced.
 さらにまた、以上説明した実施の形態によれば、会議システムSは、所定の条件に基づいて、操作端末4の制御部46により1の入力画面が選択される。そのため、本発明にかかる会議システムは、情報の入力を行う者が設定した内容同士の矛盾を回避することができる。すなわち、本発明にかかる会議システムは、簡易な構成で確実な設定作業を実現する。 Furthermore, according to the embodiment described above, in the conference system S, the control unit 46 of the operation terminal 4 selects an input screen of 1 based on a predetermined condition. Therefore, the conference system according to the present invention can avoid the contradiction between the contents set by the person who inputs the information. That is, the conference system according to the present invention realizes reliable setting work with a simple configuration.
 さらにまた、以上説明した実施の形態によれば、会議システムSは、オーバーライドと、マイクオントリガーと、が関連付けられた会議モードを選択させることで、各DU2の音声スロットと音声領域との割当方式やリクエストフラグの付与方式を設定する。そのため、例えば、オペレーターなどの専門知識を要する者でなくとも、複数の会議モードの中から会議の内容や参加者の構成などから最適な会議モードを適宜選択することで、容易に会議システムSの動作設定の準備を行うことができる。すわなち、本発明にかかる会議システムは、設定作業の利便性に優れる。 Furthermore, according to the embodiment described above, the conference system S selects the conference mode in which the override and the microphone on trigger are associated with each other, thereby allocating the voice slot of each DU 2 and the voice area, or Set the request flag assignment method. Therefore, for example, even if it is not a person who needs expert knowledge such as an operator, the conference system S can be easily selected by appropriately selecting an optimal conference mode from among a plurality of conference modes from the content of the conference and the configuration of participants. It is possible to prepare for operation setting. That is, the conference system according to the present invention is excellent in the convenience of setting work.
●本発明にかかる会議システムのまとめ●
 以上説明した本発明にかかる会議システムの特徴について、以下にまとめて記載しておく。
Summary of conference system according to the present invention
The features of the conference system according to the present invention described above will be summarized below.
(特徴1)
 コントロールユニット(CU1)と、
 ディスカッションユニット(DU2)と、
 操作端末(操作端末4)と、
を有してなり、
 前記ディスカッションユニットは、前記コントロールユニットに対して音声情報を送信し、
 前記操作端末は、前記コントロールユニットと前記ディスカッションユニットのそれぞれと通信回線を介して接続され、
 前記コントロールユニットは、
 記憶部(記憶部13)、
を備え、
 前記操作端末は、
 表示部(表示部44)と、
 制御部(制御部46)と、
を備え、
 前記記憶部は、前記コントロールユニットと前記ディスカッションユニットとの動作を制御する複数の制御情報を記憶し、
 前記表示部は、前記複数の制御情報のいずれかが入力される複数の入力画面のうちの1の入力画面を表示し、
 前記制御部は、所定の条件に基づいて、複数の前記入力画面の中から前記表示部に表示される前記入力画面を選択する、
ことを特徴とする会議システム。
(Feature 1)
Control unit (CU1),
With the discussion unit (DU2),
Operation terminal (operation terminal 4),
Have
The discussion unit sends audio information to the control unit;
The operation terminal is connected to each of the control unit and the discussion unit via a communication line.
The control unit
Storage unit (storage unit 13),
Equipped with
The operation terminal is
A display unit (display unit 44),
A control unit (control unit 46),
Equipped with
The storage unit stores a plurality of control information for controlling the operation of the control unit and the discussion unit,
The display unit displays an input screen of one of a plurality of input screens to which any one of the plurality of control information is input,
The control unit selects the input screen displayed on the display unit from among the plurality of input screens based on a predetermined condition.
A conference system characterized by
(特徴2)
 前記制御部は、前記複数の制御情報のうち特定の制御情報が前記記憶部に記憶されている否かを判定し、前記判定の結果に基づいて、前記表示部に表示される前記入力画面を選択する、
特徴1記載の会議システム。
(Feature 2)
The control unit determines whether or not specific control information is stored in the storage unit among the plurality of control information, and the input screen displayed on the display unit is determined based on the result of the determination. select,
The conference system according to Feature 1.
(特徴3)
 前記コントロールユニットは、
 接続部(ユニット接続部12b)、
を備え、
 前記接続部には、前記ディスカッションユニットが接続される、
特徴1記載の会議システム。
(Feature 3)
The control unit
Connection unit (unit connection unit 12b),
Equipped with
The discussion unit is connected to the connection unit.
The conference system according to Feature 1.
(特徴4)
 前記制御部は、前記接続部に前記ディスカッションユニットが接続しているか否かを判定し、前記判定の結果に基づいて、前記表示部に表示される前記入力画面を選択する、
特徴3記載の会議システム。
(Feature 4)
The control unit determines whether the discussion unit is connected to the connection unit, and selects the input screen displayed on the display unit based on a result of the determination.
The conference system according to Feature 3.
(特徴5)
 前記接続部には、前記ディスカッションユニットが複数接続され、
 前記制御部は、前記接続部に前記複数のディスカッションユニットのうちの特定のディスカッションユニットが接続しているか否かを判定し、前記判定の結果に基づいて、前記表示部に表示される前記入力画面を選択する、
特徴3記載の会議システム。
(Feature 5)
A plurality of the discussion units are connected to the connection unit,
The control unit determines whether or not a specific discussion unit of the plurality of discussion units is connected to the connection unit, and the input screen displayed on the display unit based on the result of the determination. To choose
The conference system according to Feature 3.
(特徴6)
 前記制御部は、前記接続部に接続している前記ディスカッションユニットの接続異常が発生しているか否かを判定し、前記判定の結果に基づいて、前記表示部に表示される前記入力画面を選択する、
特徴3記載の会議システム。
(Feature 6)
The control unit determines whether or not a connection abnormality of the discussion unit connected to the connection unit has occurred, and selects the input screen displayed on the display unit based on the result of the determination. Do,
The conference system according to Feature 3.
(特徴7)
 前記複数の制御情報は、
 前記コントロールユニットが前記ディスカッションユニットを特定するために用いる通信情報、
を含み、
 前記制御部は、前記接続部に前記ディスカッションユニットが接続していないときに、前記通信情報が入力される前記入力画面を前記表示部に表示させる、
特徴3記載の会議システム。
(Feature 7)
The plurality of control information is
Communication information used by the control unit to identify the discussion unit,
Including
The control unit causes the display unit to display the input screen to which the communication information is input when the discussion unit is not connected to the connection unit.
The conference system according to Feature 3.
(特徴8)
 前記複数の制御情報は、
 前記ディスカッションユニットから前記コントロールユニットへの前記音声情報の送信の優先順位を示す優先権限(プライオリティ)情報、
を含み、
 前記制御部は、前記接続部に前記ディスカッションユニットが複数接続しているときに、前記優先権限情報が入力される前記入力画面を前記表示部に表示させる、
特徴3乃至7のいずれかに記載の会議システム。
(Feature 8)
The plurality of control information is
Priority right information indicating priority order of transmission of the voice information from the discussion unit to the control unit,
Including
The control unit causes the display unit to display the input screen to which the priority authority information is input when a plurality of discussion units are connected to the connection unit.
The conference system according to any one of Features 3 to 7.
(特徴9)
 複数の前記入力画面は、
 前記コントロールユニットの設定情報が入力される初期画面と、
 前記ディスカッションユニットの設定情報が入力される準備画面と、
 前記ディスカッションユニットの動作を制御する制御情報が入力される進行画面と、
を含む、
特徴1記載の会議システム。
(Feature 9)
The plurality of input screens are
An initial screen on which setting information of the control unit is input;
A preparation screen on which setting information of the discussion unit is input;
A progress screen on which control information for controlling the operation of the discussion unit is input;
including,
The conference system according to Feature 1.
S    会議システム
1    コントロールユニット(CU)
2    ディスカッションユニット(DU)
3    マイクロホン
4    操作端末
11   通信部(CU通信部)
12   接続部
13   記憶部(CU記憶部)
14   表示部
15   操作部
16   制御部(CU制御部)
20   筐体
21   通信部(DU通信部)
22   接続部
23   記憶部
24   表示部
25   操作部
26   制御部(DU制御部)
27   スピーカ
28   発光部
28a  第1発光部
28b  第2発光部

 
S Conference System 1 Control Unit (CU)
2 Discussion unit (DU)
3 Microphone 4 Operation Terminal 11 Communication Unit (CU Communication Unit)
12 connection unit 13 storage unit (CU storage unit)
14 Display unit 15 Operation unit 16 Control unit (CU control unit)
20 Case 21 Communication Unit (DU Communication Unit)
22 connection unit 23 storage unit 24 display unit 25 operation unit 26 control unit (DU control unit)
27 Speaker 28 Light emitting unit 28 a First light emitting unit 28 b Second light emitting unit

Claims (9)

  1.  コントロールユニットと、
     ディスカッションユニットと、
     操作端末と、
    を有してなり、
     前記ディスカッションユニットは、前記コントロールユニットに対して音声情報を送信し、
     前記操作端末は、前記コントロールユニットと前記ディスカッションユニットのそれぞれと通信回線を介して接続され、
     前記コントロールユニットは、
     記憶部、
    を備え、
     前記操作端末は、
     表示部と、
     制御部と、
    を備え、
     前記記憶部は、前記コントロールユニットと前記ディスカッションユニットとの動作を制御する複数の制御情報を記憶し、
     前記表示部は、前記複数の制御情報のいずれかが入力される複数の入力画面のうちの1の入力画面を表示し、
     前記制御部は、所定の条件に基づいて、複数の前記入力画面の中から前記表示部に表示される前記入力画面を選択する、
    ことを特徴とする会議システム。
    A control unit,
    With the discussion unit
    Operation terminal,
    Have
    The discussion unit sends audio information to the control unit;
    The operation terminal is connected to each of the control unit and the discussion unit via a communication line.
    The control unit
    Storage unit,
    Equipped with
    The operation terminal is
    A display unit,
    A control unit,
    Equipped with
    The storage unit stores a plurality of control information for controlling the operation of the control unit and the discussion unit,
    The display unit displays an input screen of one of a plurality of input screens to which any one of the plurality of control information is input,
    The control unit selects the input screen displayed on the display unit from among the plurality of input screens based on a predetermined condition.
    A conference system characterized by
  2.  前記制御部は、前記複数の制御情報のうち特定の制御情報が前記記憶部に記憶されている否かを判定し、前記判定の結果に基づいて、前記表示部に表示される前記入力画面を選択する、
    請求項1記載の会議システム。
    The control unit determines whether or not specific control information is stored in the storage unit among the plurality of control information, and the input screen displayed on the display unit is determined based on the result of the determination. select,
    The conference system according to claim 1.
  3.  前記コントロールユニットは、
     接続部、
    を備え、
     前記接続部には、前記ディスカッションユニットが接続される、
    請求項1記載の会議システム。
    The control unit
    Connection,
    Equipped with
    The discussion unit is connected to the connection unit.
    The conference system according to claim 1.
  4.  前記制御部は、前記接続部に前記ディスカッションユニットが接続しているか否かを判定し、前記判定の結果に基づいて、前記表示部に表示される前記入力画面を選択する、
    請求項3記載の会議システム。
    The control unit determines whether the discussion unit is connected to the connection unit, and selects the input screen displayed on the display unit based on a result of the determination.
    The conference system according to claim 3.
  5.  前記接続部には、前記ディスカッションユニットが複数接続され、
     前記制御部は、前記接続部に前記複数のディスカッションユニットのうちの特定のディスカッションユニットが接続しているか否かを判定し、前記判定の結果に基づいて、前記表示部に表示される前記入力画面を選択する、
    請求項3記載の会議システム。
    A plurality of the discussion units are connected to the connection unit,
    The control unit determines whether or not a specific discussion unit of the plurality of discussion units is connected to the connection unit, and the input screen displayed on the display unit based on the result of the determination. To choose
    The conference system according to claim 3.
  6.  前記制御部は、前記接続部に接続している前記ディスカッションユニットの接続異常が発生しているか否かを判定し、前記判定の結果に基づいて、前記表示部に表示される前記入力画面を選択する、
    請求項3記載の会議システム。
    The control unit determines whether or not a connection abnormality of the discussion unit connected to the connection unit has occurred, and selects the input screen displayed on the display unit based on the result of the determination. Do,
    The conference system according to claim 3.
  7.  前記複数の制御情報は、
     前記コントロールユニットが前記ディスカッションユニットを特定するために用いる通信情報、
    を含み、
     前記制御部は、前記接続部に前記ディスカッションユニットが接続していないときに、前記通信情報が入力される前記入力画面を前記表示部に表示させる、
    請求項2記載の会議システム。
    The plurality of control information is
    Communication information used by the control unit to identify the discussion unit,
    Including
    The control unit causes the display unit to display the input screen to which the communication information is input when the discussion unit is not connected to the connection unit.
    The conference system according to claim 2.
  8.  前記複数の制御情報は、
     前記ディスカッションユニットから前記コントロールユニットへの前記音声情報の送信の優先順位を示す優先権限情報、
    を含み、
     前記制御部は、前記接続部に前記ディスカッションユニットが複数接続しているときに、前記優先権限情報が入力される前記入力画面を前記表示部に表示させる、
    請求項3乃至7のいずれかに記載の会議システム。
    The plurality of control information is
    Priority authority information indicating the priority of transmission of the audio information from the discussion unit to the control unit;
    Including
    The control unit causes the display unit to display the input screen to which the priority authority information is input when a plurality of discussion units are connected to the connection unit.
    The conference system according to any one of claims 3 to 7.
  9.  複数の前記入力画面は、
     前記コントロールユニットの設定情報が入力される初期画面と、
     前記ディスカッションユニットの設定情報が入力される準備画面と、
     前記ディスカッションユニットの動作を制御する制御情報が入力される進行画面と、
    を含む、
    請求項1記載の会議システム。
     

     
    The plurality of input screens are
    An initial screen on which setting information of the control unit is input;
    A preparation screen on which setting information of the discussion unit is input;
    A progress screen on which control information for controlling the operation of the discussion unit is input;
    including,
    The conference system according to claim 1.


PCT/JP2016/083444 2016-02-29 2016-11-10 Meeting system WO2017149841A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2018502518A JP6719785B2 (en) 2016-02-29 2016-11-10 Conference system

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2016038432 2016-02-29
JP2016-038432 2016-02-29

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2017149841A1 true WO2017149841A1 (en) 2017-09-08

Family

ID=59742748

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2016/083444 WO2017149841A1 (en) 2016-02-29 2016-11-10 Meeting system

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6719785B2 (en)
WO (1) WO2017149841A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000148623A (en) * 1998-09-04 2000-05-30 Ricoh Co Ltd Image forming device
JP2005017495A (en) * 2003-06-24 2005-01-20 Seiko Epson Corp Projector
JP2009089296A (en) * 2007-10-03 2009-04-23 Konica Minolta Business Technologies Inc Printer
WO2015006681A1 (en) * 2013-07-11 2015-01-15 Harman International Industries, Inc. System and method for digital audio conference workflow management
JP2015027032A (en) * 2013-07-29 2015-02-05 キヤノン株式会社 Imaging device, control method therefor, and program

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000148623A (en) * 1998-09-04 2000-05-30 Ricoh Co Ltd Image forming device
JP2005017495A (en) * 2003-06-24 2005-01-20 Seiko Epson Corp Projector
JP2009089296A (en) * 2007-10-03 2009-04-23 Konica Minolta Business Technologies Inc Printer
WO2015006681A1 (en) * 2013-07-11 2015-01-15 Harman International Industries, Inc. System and method for digital audio conference workflow management
JP2015027032A (en) * 2013-07-29 2015-02-05 キヤノン株式会社 Imaging device, control method therefor, and program

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2017149841A1 (en) 2018-12-27
JP6719785B2 (en) 2020-07-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6725162B2 (en) Conference system
US11967333B2 (en) Systems and methods for integrated conferencing platform
JP6801890B2 (en) Conference system
DE3823913A1 (en) COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH SPECIFIED COMMUNICATION END DEVICES, PROVIDED AND CONTROLLED FUNCTIONS BY A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM THROUGH INFORMATION TRANSMISSION
US20140286506A1 (en) Digital audio mixing device
KR20130103386A (en) Mixing console and method of mixing by means of a mixing console
WO2017149841A1 (en) Meeting system
US10397408B2 (en) Digital intercom system having a communication device and linked audio output device
JP6757082B2 (en) Conference system
JP6762541B2 (en) Conference system
JP6739056B2 (en) Control device and identification number allocation method
JP6216759B2 (en) Method and system for audio calibration of an audio device
JP5186871B2 (en) Network audio system channel patching system
US10560825B2 (en) Digital intercom system having multiple master stations
WO2019163702A1 (en) Audio signal input/output device, acoustic system, audio signal input/output method, and program
WO2017145434A1 (en) Discussion unit
JP2007259182A (en) Logic connection automatic setting device and program
WO2017221408A1 (en) Distribution destination designation device, distribution destination designation method, and distribution destination designation program
JP5765358B2 (en) Digital audio mixing apparatus and program
JP2014187638A (en) Digital audio mixing device and program
JP2018101643A (en) Lighting control system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2018502518

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 16892677

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 16892677

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1